Lexus GS450H Owner's manual

Lexus GS450H Owner's manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle 
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For US owners
Reporting safety defects for US owners.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Index
1-6. Refueling....................................... 58
Before driving
Opening the fuel tank cap.......... 58
1-1. Hybrid system.................................. 2
1-7. Anti-theft system ......................... 62
Hybrid system...................................... 2
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer 
system ............................................... 62
Alarm.................................................... 64
Theft prevention labels 
(U.S.A.)............................................. 66
1-2. Key information ............................ 12
Keys ....................................................... 12
1-3. Opening, closing and locking 
the doors and trunk ................... 14
1-8. Safety information....................... 67
Correct driving posture ............... 67
SRS airbags ....................................... 69
Child restraint systems ................ 80
Installing child restraints............... 83
Smart access system with 
push-button start ........................... 14
Wireless remote control .............. 23
Doors.................................................... 26
Trunk.................................................... 30
2
1-4. Adjustable components ............ 34
Front seats.......................................... 34
Driving position memory 
system .............................................. 36
Head restraints................................. 39
Seat belts ............................................ 42
Steering wheel.................................. 48
Inside rear view mirror.................. 49
Outside rear view mirrors.......... 50
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures..................... 94
Driving the vehicle.......................... 94
Starting the hybrid system.......... 101
Transmission ................................... 104
Turn signal lever............................. 108
Parking brake ................................. 109
2-2. Instrument cluster ...................... 110
1-5. Opening and closing the 
windows and moon roof .......... 52
Gauges and meters ...................... 110
Indicators and warning lights ..... 114
Multi-information display............. 117
Power windows................................ 52
Moon roof ......................................... 55
ii
2-3. Operating the lights and 
windshield wipers................... 120
Headlight switch............................ 120
Fog light switch .............................. 123
Windshield wipers and 
washer............................................. 124
Headlight cleaner switch ........... 126
2-4. Using other driving 
systems ....................................... 127
Cruise control ................................. 127
Dynamic radar cruise 
control ............................................ 130
Intuitive parking assist ................ 139
Rear view monitor system ......... 158
AVS (Adaptive Variable 
Suspension System).................... 161
Driving assist systems.................. 162
PCS (Pre-Collision 
System) .......................................... 167
2-5. Driving information ................... 170
Cargo and luggage...................... 170
Vehicle load limits......................... 173
Winter driving tips ........................ 174
Trailer towing.................................. 179
Dinghy towing ................................ 180
iii
3
Interior features
3-1. Using the touch screen ........... 182
Touch screen .................................. 182
Setting the touch screen ............ 185
1
3-2. Using the air conditioning 
2
system and defogger............... 191
Automatic air conditioning 
system ............................................... 191
3
Rear window and outside rear 
view mirror defoggers.................. 199
3-3. Using the audio system........... 200
Audio system type ...................... 200
Using the radio.............................. 203
Using the cassette player .......... 212
Using the CD player.................... 216
Playing MP3 and WMA 
discs ................................................ 224
Using the DVD player .............. 232
Playing DVD video/audio........ 235
Playing video CD......................... 248
DVD player and DVD video 
disc information ......................... 252
Optimal use of the audio/
video system................................ 256
Using the steering 
switches......................................... 260
4
5
6
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
3-4. Using the hands-free 
system........................................ 263
Hands-free system ...................... 263
Using the Bluetooth® 
phone ............................................ 268
Setting the hands-free 
system ............................................. 281
4
4-1. Maintenance and care............ 344
Cleaning and protecting the 
vehicle exterior .......................... 344
Cleaning and protecting the 
vehicle interior............................ 346
3-5. Using the interior lights .......... 307
Interior lights list............................ 307
4-2. Maintenance.............................. 349
Maintenance requirements ..... 349
General maintenance................. 351
Emission inspection and 
maintenance (I/M) 
programs ...................................... 354
3-6. Using the storage features ...... 311
List of storage features.................. 311
3-7. Other interior features............ 317
Sun visors.......................................... 317
Vanity mirror................................... 318
Clock.................................................. 319
Outside temperature 
display ........................................... 320
Ashtrays ............................................ 321
Cigarette lighter ........................... 322
Power outlet................................... 323
Seat heaters ................................... 324
Seat heaters and 
ventilators .................................... 326
Armrest ........................................... 328
Rear sunshade............................... 329
Floor mats......................................... 331
Trunk features................................ 332
Garage door opener.................. 334
Compass.......................................... 339
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself 
maintenance............................ 355
Do-it-yourself service 
precautions................................. 355
Hood................................................. 358
Positioning the jack .................... 359
Engine compartment................... 361
Tires ................................................... 375
Tire inflation pressure................ 385
Wheels............................................. 389
Air conditioning filter................... 391
Electronic key battery ................ 393
Checking and replacing 
fuses............................................... 395
Headlight aim.................................... 411
Light bulbs........................................ 413
iv
5
When trouble arises
6
Vehicle specifications
5-1. Essential information .............. 420
6-1. Specifications............................ 480
If your vehicle needs to be 
towed.............................................. 420
If you think something is 
wrong ............................................. 427
Event data recorder.................... 428
Maintenance data....................... 480
Fuel information........................... 489
Tire information ............................ 492
1
2
6-2. Customization .......................... 500
Customizable features ............. 500
5-2. Steps to take in an 
emergency .............................. 430
6-3. Initialization ............................... 505 3
If a warning light turns on or a 
warning buzzer sounds............... 430
If a warning message is 
displayed....................................... 436
If you have a flat tire 
(Vehicles with run-flat 
tires)................................................ 455
If you have a flat tire 
(Vehicles with standard 
tires)................................................ 456
If the hybrid system will not 
start ................................................. 466
If the shift lever cannot be 
shifted from P.............................. 467
If you lose your keys................... 468
When the electronic key 
battery is discharged ............... 469
If the 12 volt battery is 
discharged .................................... 471
If your vehicle overheats ........... 475
If the vehicle becomes 
stuck................................................ 478
Items to initialize .......................... 505
7
For US owners
4
Reporting safety defects for 
U.S.A. owners............................ 508
5
Index
Alphabetical index............................... 510
6
What to do if........................................... 518
7
v
Pictorial index
Exterior
Headlight (low beam)
P. 120
Windshield wipers P. 124
Parking light P. 120
Moon roof  P. 55
Outside rear view
mirror P. 50
Hood P. 358
Side marker light P. 120
Fog light P. 123
Turn signal light P. 108
Headlight (high beam) P. 120
vi
Rear window defogger P. 199
Tail lights P. 120
Fuel filler door P. 58
Trunk P. 30
Door P. 26
Tire
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 375
Turn signal light P. 108
P. 456
P. 487
Side marker light P. 120
P. 492
: If equipped
vii
Pictorial index
Interior
Door pocket P. 316
Seat belt P. 42
Head restraint P. 39
Floor mat P. 331
Power window 
switch P. 52
Driver airbag P. 69
Knee airbags P. 69
A
Front passenger
airbag P. 69
Front seat P. 34
Armrest P. 328
Cup holders P. 315
SRS side airbag P. 69
Ashtray P. 321
Console box P. 312
Power outlet P. 323
viii
A
Inside rear view mirror P. 49
Personal light P. 307
Moon roof switch P. 55
Personal light P. 307
Interior light P. 307
SRS curtain shield airbag P. 69
Interior light P. 307
Vanity mirror P. 318
Sun visor P. 317
Garage door opener switches P. 334
Compass P. 339
: If equipped
ix
Pictorial index
Interior
B
Driving position memory switches P. 36
Door lock switch P. 26
Window lock switch P. 52
Power window switches P. 52
x
C
Cup holders P. 315
Shift lever P. 104
Cigarette lighter P. 322
Ashtray P. 321
Shift lock override button P. 467
: If equipped
xi
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Windshield wipers and washer switch P. 124
Multi-information display P. 117
Gauges and meters P. 110
Headlight switch P. 120
Turn signal lever P. 108
Fog light switch P. 123
Seat heater switches P. 324
Seat heater/ventilator switches
P. 326
Power switch P. 101
Parking brake pedal
P. 109
Tilt and telescopic steering 
control switch P. 48
Coin holder P. 314
“AVS” switch P. 161
Mode select switch P. 105
“TRAC OFF” switch P. 164
Trunk opener main switch P. 30
Glove box P. 312
xii
A
Audio remote control switches P. 260
B
Telephone switch P. 263
“DISP” switch P. 118
Distance switch P. 132
Cruise control switch
P. 127, 130
Talk switch* P. 275
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
xiii
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
C
Outside temperature display P. 320
Clock P. 319
Navigation system*
Security indicator P. 62, 64
Rear window and outside 
rear view mirror defoggers
Air conditioning 
system P. 191
P. 199
Audio system
P. 200
Emergency flashers
xiv
D
Headlight cleaner switch P. 126
Rear sunshade switch P. 329
Intuitive parking assist switch P. 139
“AFS OFF” switch P. 121
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter 
reset button P. 111
Instrument panel light control
P. 111
Trunk opener P. 30
Fuel filler door opener P. 58
Outside rear view mirror switches P. 50
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
xv
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the hybrid system, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, vehicle dynamics
integrated management, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be
sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same
amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or
home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.
xvi
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Smart access system with push-button start
Users of any electrical medical devices such as implanted pacemakers should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the
influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. (P. 12, 14)
Leak detection pump (for the U.S.A. and Canada)
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This check is conducted several hours after the hybrid system is turned off. You may hear a sound coming from
underneath the trunk for several minutes, however this does not indicate a malfunction.
xvii
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing
with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can
be fatal to children.
■ Dispose of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there
is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event of that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid
battery must be disposed of your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the
hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, they may cause electric shock that can
result in death or serious injury.
xviii
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Safety symbol
Throughout this manual, you will also see the symbol of a circle
with a slash through it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or
“Do not let this happen”.
xix
xx
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system ............................... 2
Hybrid system................................... 2
1
1-5. Opening and closing the 
windows and moon roof ....... 52
Power windows............................. 52
1-2. Key information.......................... 12
Moon roof ....................................... 55
Keys..................................................... 12
1-6. Refueling..................................... 58
1-3. Opening, closing and locking 
the doors and trunk................. 14
Opening the fuel tank cap ....... 58
Smart access system with 
push-button start........................ 14
1-7. Anti-theft system ...................... 62
Wireless remote control............ 23
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer 
system............................................ 62
Doors................................................. 26
Alarm ................................................ 64
Trunk .................................................. 30
Theft prevention labels 
(U.S.A.).......................................... 66
1-4. Adjustable components.......... 34
Front seats ....................................... 34
1-8. Safety information.................... 67
Driving position memory 
system ............................................ 36
Correct driving posture ............. 67
Head restraints.............................. 39
Child restraint systems .............. 80
Seat belts ......................................... 42
Installing child restraints............ 83
SRS airbags .................................... 69
Steering wheel............................... 48
Inside rear view mirror............... 49
Outside rear view mirrors ....... 50
1
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics
of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and
reducing exhaust emissions.
Gasoline engine
Electric motor (Traction motor)
■ When stopped/during take-off
The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During takeoff, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow
speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped
and the motor is used.
2
1-1. Hybrid system
■ During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor
(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.
1
Before driving
■ When accelerating sharply
The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added via electric motor (traction motor) to that of the gasoline engine.
■ When braking (Regenerative brake)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
■ Regenerative braking
The motor generator converts kinetic energy to electric energy when:
● The accelerator pedal is released.
● The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in “D” or “S”.
■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:
● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
● During low or high hybrid battery (traction battery) temperature
■ Charging the battery
● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is
left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30
minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and
you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12 volt battery, contact your
Lexus dealer.
● If the shift lever is in “N”, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in
“D” or “S” to avoid discharging the battery.
3
1-1. Hybrid system
■ After the 12 volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to
move. Always put the shift lever in “P” when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating,
and are not a malfunction.
● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear
seat when the hybrid system starts or stops.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the hybrid system starts or
stops.
● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard from the regenerative brake when you press the brake
pedal.
● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
● You may hear cooling fan sounds coming from the air intake vents behind the
rear seat.
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.
Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
4
1-1. Hybrid system
High voltage components
1
Before driving
Inverter unit
Air conditioning compressor
Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
DC/DC converter
Service plug
Electric motor (Traction motor)
High voltage cables (orange
color)
Caution label
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage
system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that become
extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution
labels attached to the vehicle.
5
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Hybrid battery air vent
Hybrid battery air vent
There is an air intake vent on the
package tray for the purpose of
cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes
blocked, the hybrid battery may
overheat, leading to a reduction in
hybrid battery output.
Emergency shut off system
The emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and
stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage
when a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor. If the
emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To
restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information
display (P. 117) and the touch screen(P. 182). The following images
are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Energy monitor
● How to display on the touch screen:
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
If the “Consumption” screen is displayed, touch
.
● How to display on the multi-information display:
STEP 1
6
Push the
tor display.
button several times to select the energy moni-
1-1. Hybrid system
Multi-information
display
Touch screen
When the vehicle is
powered by the electric motor (traction
motor)
1
Before driving
When the vehicle is
powered by both the
gasoline engine and the
electric motor (traction
motor)
When the vehicle is
powered by the 
gasoline engine
When the vehicle is
charging the hybrid 
battery (traction 
battery)
When there is no
energy flow
Hybrid battery 
(traction battery) status
Low
Full
Low
Full
7
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Consumption
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2
Touch
on the “Information” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch
.
Fuel consumption in the past 30
minutes
Regenerated energy in the past
30 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up
to 4 symbols are shown.
Best past fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Cruising range
■ Resetting the consumption data
Touching
will reset the “Average fuel consumption”. Touching
will reset all the data (except the “Cruising Range”) on the “Consumption” screen.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display and
the touch screen, read the message and follow the instructions.
(P. 436)
8
1-1. Hybrid system
■ If a warning light comes on or a warning message is displayed, or the 12 volt bat-
tery is disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” light does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12 volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables and
their connectors.
● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.
Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
● Never try to open the service plug access hole located in the luggage compart-
ment. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to
high voltage.
9
Before driving
CAUTION
1
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
■ Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.
● Pull your vehicle off the road, put the shift lever in “P”, apply the parking brake,
turn the hybrid system off.
● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may
occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch it as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from
the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or if possible, boric
acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never
use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small
amount of water may be dangerous.
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the rear wheels raised. If the wheels
with the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the
motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity leakage
leading to a fire.(P. 420)
■ Nickel-metal hydride battery
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
■ Emergency shut off system
● Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables. Never
touch the parts or cables. (P. 5)
● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked
onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as
soon as possible.
10
1-1. Hybrid system
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery air vent
● Do not put foreign objects over the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery)
may overheat and be damaged.
1
● Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from
● Do not wet the air vent. It may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery).
● Do not load a large amount of water such as an aquarium into the vehicle. If water
spills over the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged.
11
Before driving
overheating.
1-2. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 14)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function 
(P. 23)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
You can use the mechanical key to
lock/unlock the doors, and to
unlock the trunk.
■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P. 31, 312)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 468)
12
1-2. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not bend the keys, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in
direct sunlight, or get them wet.
1
● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that
Before driving
blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
13
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key, for example in your pocket.
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 15)
Unlocks the trunk (P. 15)
Starts and stops the hybrid system (P. 101)
14
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking and unlocking the doors
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
1
Before driving
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
15
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna outside trunk
Antenna inside trunk
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that
generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communica-
tion device
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When the electronic key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the electronic key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a
personal computer
In these situations, remove all possible cause of malfunction, or follow the steps outlined in “When the electronic key battery is discharged”. (P. 469)
16
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP 1 Turn the power switch “OFF”.
STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and
for approximately 5 seconds while pushing the
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (Wait for
at least 5 seconds after each operation to continue an operation.)
Multi-information
display
Unlocking doors
Beep
Hold the driver’s door handle
to unlock only the driver’s
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
door
Interior: Rings once
Hold a passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors
Hold the door handle to
unlock the front and rear
doors on your side
Exterior: Beeps 4 times
Interior: Rings once
Hold the door handle to
unlock the door
Exterior: Beeps once
Interior: Rings once
Hold a door handle to unlock Exterior: Beeps twice
all doors
Interior: Rings once
17
1
Before driving
hold ,
, or
button on the key.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
● When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function 
(P. 23) or the mechanical key (P. 469)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if
the electronic key is not used.) If the smart access system with push-button start
or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 393)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances.
•
•
•
•
TVs
Personal computers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Table lamps
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
18
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Note for the smart access system with push-button start
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
1
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
19
Before driving
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in
response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 443)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds
Situation
Correction procedure
Tried to lock the doors using
the entry function while the
electronic key is still inside
the passenger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
Tried to exit the vehicle with
Turn the power switch
the electronic key and lock
“OFF” and lock the
the doors without first turning
doors again.
the power switch “OFF”
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
and all doors are locked
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Exterior alarm
Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors
sounds once for 10 the entry function while a
and lock the doors
seconds
door is open
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continuously
20
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to “P”
Shift the shift lever to
“P”.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
Turn the power switch
“OFF” and close the
driver's door.
1
Turned the power switch
“OFF” while the driver's door Close the driver's door.
is open
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key. 
(P. 469)
● Starting the hybrid system: P. 470
● Replacing the battery: P. 393
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start, anti-theft system) can be
changed. (P. 500)
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
21
Before driving
Switched to “ACC” mode
while the driver's door is
open (Opened the driver's
Interior alarm rings door when the power switch
is in “ACC” mode.)
continuously
Correction procedure
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system with push-button start antennas.
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
22
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Opens the windows and
moon roof (push and hold)
Unlocks the trunk 
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm 
(push and hold) (P. 65)
1
Before driving
■ 2-step unlocking function
When you push the button, the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
■ Operation indicator
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds when the windows and moon roof begin
to open.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the
door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once
more.
■ Security feature
P. 19
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 21
23
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 16
■ Low battery
If the wireless remote control does not function or if it only operates very close to
the vehicle, the battery may be low. (P. 393)
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. 2-step unlocking function, trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(P. 500)
■ Certification for wireless remote control (for vehicles sold in the U.S.A.)
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
24
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for wireless remote control (for vehicles sold in Canada)
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
1
Before driving
25
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■ Smart access system with push-button start
P. 15
■ Wireless remote control
P. 23
■ Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
26
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of “P” locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the power
switch “OFF”.
27
Before driving
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down rear door
switches to lock the rear doors.
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Close all the doors and switch the power switch to “IG-ON”
mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”, press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for 5 seconds then release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.
Function
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
Switch position
“P”
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
“N”
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
28
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Closing the front doors from outside with the inside lock button set in the locked
position
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 469)
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (P. 500)
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the front door while driving.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
29
1
Before driving
The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, or
the electronic key is left in the vehicle. (However, depending on the key's location,
the system may not be able to detect it. In these instances the door lock protection
function will not operate properly.)
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■ Wireless remote control
P. 23
■ Trunk opener
Open the trunk lid.
■ Smart access system with push-button start
P. 15
30
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Luggage security system
Enabled
Disabled
After turning off the trunk opener main switch, lock the glove box using
the mechanical key. Take the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. (P. 12)
31
1
Before driving
The trunk opener feature using the trunk opener switch, wireless remote
control and smart access system with push-button start can be disabled
by turning off a switch inside the glove box. This function allows you to
keep valuables safety locked in the trunk when leaving a key with a parking attendant.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Trunk lid closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open (not latched properly), the trunk
easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■ Trunk light
When the trunk light switch is set to ON, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is
opened.
ON
OFF
■ Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 469)
32
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the
vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When the trunk has not been fully closed
Be careful that your fingers do not get caught by the trunk lid when it is closing automatically.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the trunk lid closer
Do not apply excessive force when the closer is operating.
33
Before driving
■ When children are in the vehicle
1
1-4. Adjustable components
Front seats
Seat position fore/aft control switch
For driver’s seat only: Height of the head restraint also moves upward or
downward with the seat movement.
Seatback angle control switch
Seat cushion (front) angle control switch
Vertical height control switch
Lumbar support control switch
34
1-4. Adjustable components
CAUTION
■ Reclining adjustment
■ When adjusting the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat
Wait until a passenger is seated or have gotten off the front passenger’s seat before
operating the switch to avoid injuring the passenger.
35
1
Before driving
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to
reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
1-4. Adjustable components
Driving position memory system (if equipped)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer's
memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this
function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
The same buttons are found on the front passenger's side, allowing the
position of the front passenger's seat to be memorized.
■ Entering a position to memory
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Switch to “IG-ON” mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
While pushing the “SET” button,
push button “1”, “2” or “3” until
the signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
36
1-4. Adjustable components
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Switch to “IG-ON” mode.
1
Before driving
Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the desired position.
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation (driver
side only)
Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the
driver’s door using the entry function or wireless remote control and
open the driver’s door. Steering wheel position is recalled when the
power switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode.
■ Setting the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1 Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1”, “2”
or “3” buttons on the driver’s side. (P. 36)
STEP 2 Turn the power switch to the “OFF” mode, then close the driver’s
door.
Push the “1”, “2” or “3” button on
STEP 3
or
the driver’s side and the
button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1
second until you hear a beep.
37
1-4. Adjustable components
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1 Close the driver’s door with the power switch set to the “OFF”
mode.
STEP 2 Push the “SET” button and the
or
button on the wireless
remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear
2 beeps.
■ Retained accessory power
Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column) can
be activated within 30 seconds after the corresponding side door is opened, even if
the power switch is in the “OFF” mode.
■ If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made
The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”)
again.
■ If the 12 volt battery is disconnected
The memorized positions must be reset because the computer's memory is erased
when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another seat position memory button.
38
1-4. Adjustable components
Head restraints
■ Vertical adjustment
Driver’s seat
Head restraint height can be
adjusted automatically along
with the seat position adjustment. (P. 34)
1
Before driving
Front passenger’s and rear seats
Grip head restraint and move
it up or down.
Lock
release
button
Push and hold the lock release
button when lowering the head
restraint.
Grip head restraint and
remove while holding the
lock release button.
■ Horizontal adjustment
Front and outboard rear seats
Grip head restraint and twist to
tilt forward or backward.
39
1-4. Adjustable components
■ Adjusting the height of the driver’s head restraint manually
Push and hold the lock release button when
lowering or raising the head restraint.
■ Removing the driver’s seat head restraint
For removal and installation, ask your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
■ Head restraints of different seats
The head restraints are specially designed for the seats on which they are installed.
40
1-4. Adjustable components
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
1
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
Before driving
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
41
1-4. Adjustable components
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Release button
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
42
1-4. Adjustable components
■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Up
Down
1
Before driving
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)
If the shoulder belt fits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
43
1-4. Adjustable components
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a
collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting
the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the
driver and passenger at an earlier stage.
The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (P. 167)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 87)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 42)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
44
1-4. Adjustable components
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 42)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriately for the child, until the child become
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 42 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
The seat belts cannot be used if a pretensioner has activated. After an accident,
have your Lexus dealer inspect the pretensioners and replace them, if necessary.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
45
Before driving
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 80)
1
1-4. Adjustable components
CAUTION
■ Wearing a seat belt
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at the same time, including children.
● Children should be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an
appropriate child restraint system.
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from injury.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt
does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of a seat belt.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may cause it to activate or operate improperly and may
cause death or serious injury.
46
1-4. Adjustable components
CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender, if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
1
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system, because
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
■ Precaution for pre-collision seat belts
Do not rely solely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay attention to the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
47
Before driving
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or injury in the event of a collision.
1-4. Adjustable components
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
Auto tilt away and auto return
When the power switch is turned
“OFF”, the steering wheel returns
to its stowed position by moving up
and away to enable easier driver
entry and exit.
Switching to “ACC” or “IG-ON”
mode will return the steering wheel
to the original position.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
48
1-4. Adjustable components
Inside rear view mirror
In the “AUTO” mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.
Turns “AUTO” mode on/off
1
Before driving
The indicator comes on when
“AUTO” mode is turned ON.
The anti-glare mirror default
mode is “AUTO”. The anti-glare
mirror is automatically set to
“AUTO” whenever the power
switch is turned ON.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure correct functioning of the sensors,
do not touch or cover the sensors.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, or resulting in
death or serious injury.
49
1-4. Adjustable components
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the power switch is in
“ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.
Select the mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
Folding the mirrors
Press the switch
Pressing again will extend the mirrors.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror heaters to defog the mirrors. (P. 199)
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to “AUTO” mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P. 49)
50
1-4. Adjustable components
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (neither “L” nor
“R” selected).
1
■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle 
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch
of a button. (P. 36)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in losing control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Before driving, be sure to extend mirrors and make an adjustment properly.
■ When the mirror heaters are operating
Do not touch the mirror surface as the mirror surface becomes hot.
And do not touch the mirror surface also when the wiper switch is on at lower than
77F (25C) of the outside temperature.
NOTICE
■ If ice should jam the mirror
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the
mirror.
51
Before driving
(vehicles with driving position memory)
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*:Pushing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop
window travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
52
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ Linked door lock window operation
1
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. 
(P. 469)
■ Operating the power windows after turning the power switch “OFF”
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
power switch is switched to “ACC” mode or turned “OFF”. They cannot, however,
be operated once the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. 
(Perform for each window with the switch for each seat.)
STEP 1 Open the window halfway.
STEP 2 Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the
switch for 1 second.
The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on when initial
settings are complete.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (P. 502)
53
Before driving
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 23)
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ When closing the windows
Observe the following precautions. 
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows. 
Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
54
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof (if equipped)
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■ Opening and closing
1
Open
Before driving
Stops just before it is opened
fully. Press the switch again to
fully open.
Close
To stop partway, press the switch
lightly.
■ Tilt up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
To stop partway, press the switch
lightly.
55
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ Linked door lock moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 469)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 23)
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the power switch “OFF”
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
power switch is switched to “ACC” mode or turned “OFF”. It cannot, however, be
operated once the driver’s door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically
Keep the switch depressed.
■ To reduce moon roof wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened automatically (just before fully opened position).
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
STEP 1 Close the moon roof fully.
STEP 2 Hold down “UP” switch during the following moon roof sequence:
Tilt upTilt downSlide open (fully open)Slide close (fully close)
STEP 3 To ensure the initialization is complete, make sure automatic opening and
closing functions work properly.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (P. 502)
56
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ When opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
1
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
Before driving
it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ When closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions. 
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. 
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
57
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the power switch “OFF” and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
58
STEP 1
Press the fuel filler door
opener switch.
STEP 2
The screen to the left is displayed for a short period. Wait
until “REFUEL READY” is displayed, then proceed to the next
step.
STEP 3
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
1-6. Refueling
STEP 4
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
1
Before driving
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap clockwise until you hear a
click. The cap will revolve slightly in
the opposite direction once
released.
■ Fuel types
Use premium unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane Rating [Research Octane Number
96] or higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp. gal.)
■ Open fuel filler door warning
P. 450
59
1-6. Refueling
■ When the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable
If the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable, contact your Lexus dealer to service the
vehicle. If you must refuel your vehicle, you
can open the fuel filler door manually as
shown. The system to lower internal pressure
may not be functioning so you must turn the
cap slowly as the pressure releases. In addition, fuel may spill out during refueling. Fill the
fuel tank carefully and slowly.
CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may
result in death or serious injury.
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. 
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
60
1-6. Refueling
CAUTION
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■ Refueling
● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal
valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process.
Press the fuel filler door opener switch again.
● Do not spill fuel during refueling. 
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
61
1-7. Anti-theft system
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid
system from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the
vehicle's on-board computer.
The indicator light flashes after
the power switch has been
turned “OFF” to indicate that
the system is operating.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object.
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle.
■ Certifications for the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
62
1-7. Anti-theft system
CAUTION
■ Certifications for the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
■ For proper system operation
Do not modify, remove or disable the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system. If any
unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
63
Before driving
NOTICE
1
1-7. Anti-theft system
Alarm
The alarm warns of forcible entry using the horn and lights.
To arm the alarm, exit the vehicle, make sure that the doors,
trunk and hood are closed, and
lock all the doors.
The system will operate automatically once the indicator
changes from lit to flashing.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following:
● Unlock the doors or trunk using the smart access system with pushbutton start or the wireless remote control.
● Start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after
a few seconds.)
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, check that there is no one in the vehicle, and that all windows and moon roof are closed before locking the vehicle.
64
1-7. Anti-theft system
■ When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system. 
If the 12 volt battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be
triggered when the battery is reconnected.
1
■ Panic mode
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
65
Before driving
When
is pushed for longer than about
one second, the headlights/tail lights/emergency flashers will flash, the front and rear
interior lights will come on, and an alarm will
sound for about 60 seconds to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
1-7. Anti-theft system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
66
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat.
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 34)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. 
(P. 48)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 40)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 42)
1
Before driving
67
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to
reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. 
If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips
and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
68
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
1
Before driving
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbag
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Front side airbag/rear side airbag (rear side airbags are optional)
Can help protect the torso of the front occupants and rear outboard occupants.
69
1-8. Safety information
Curtain shield airbag
Can help protect primarily the head of front occupants and rear outboard occupants.
Airbag system components
Occupant detection sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Knee airbag
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbag
Front side airbag
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensor
Curtain shield airbag sensor
SRS warning light
Rear side airbag (if equipped)
Driver airbag
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensor
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
70
1-8. Safety information
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
1
Before driving
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar and roof side rail, may be hot
for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
■ Operating conditions (front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the
designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision in the U.S.A. and 18 mph (30 km/h) collision in Canada when the vehicle
impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate, if there is not passenger sitting
in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy, if
luggage is put in the seat or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat.
71
1-8. Safety information
■ Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.
● The SRS front side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front side airbag on
the passenger seat may deploy, if luggage is put in the seat or the seat belt is
buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
72
1-8. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag 
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
1
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
Before driving
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
73
1-8. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the 12 volt battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel, front
passenger airbag cover or lower portion of
the instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
74
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may
cause death or serious injury.
1
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the
way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining
the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
75
Before driving
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver's airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 80)
76
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger while the
vehicle is moving.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front
passenger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
77
Before driving
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
1
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel. These items can become
projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure
to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 70. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
78
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rail
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
79
Before driving
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
1
1-8. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the
child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system. 
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 83)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Infant seat
80
1-8. Safety information
Convertible seat
1
Before driving
Booster seat
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
Leave the child restraint system properly secured on the seat. Do not store the
restraint loosely on a passenger seat or in the trunk.
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a
child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. 
(P. 42)
81
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In
the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint
system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front
passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as
possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of collision.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
82
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outboard rear seats using a seat belt or a child
restraint lower anchor belt. Attach the top strap when installing a child
restraint.
1
Before driving
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 44)
Child restraint lower anchorages
Lower anchorages are provided for the outboard rear
seats. (Buttons displaying the
location of the anchorages are
attached to the seats.)
Anchor bracket 
(for top strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
83
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing child seat Infant/convertible
Place the child seat on the rear
STEP 1
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Run the seat belt through the infant
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
STEP 3
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
84
1-8. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down
into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child
seat is securely in place.
■ Forward facing Convertible child seat
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
STEP 3
Fully extend the shoulder strap and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
85
1
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1-8. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Booster seat
STEP 1
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
Sit the child in the child seat. Fit the
seat belt to the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 42)
86
1-8. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
1
Before driving
Installation with child restraint lower anchorages
Type A
STEP 1
STEP 2
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
anchorages.
If the child restraint has a top
strap, the top strap should be
latched onto the anchorage.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower anchorage system.
Canada only
87
1-8. Safety information
Type B
STEP 1
STEP 2
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
If the child restraint has a top
strap, the top strap should be
latched onto the anchorage.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower anchorage system.
Canada only
Child restraint systems with a top strap
STEP 1
88
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or lower anchors, and
lock the head restraint in place at
the lowest position.
1-8. Safety information
STEP 2
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched.
1
Before driving
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 44)
● ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort
to the child.
● Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or seri-
ous injured.
89
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child may be injured or
even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Only put a forward facing or booster child
seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing or
booster child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failing to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking.
● Ensure the belt and tab are securely locked and that the seat belt is not twisted.
● Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
90
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.
When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child seat. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
91
Before driving
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages
1
1-8. Safety information
92
When driving
2
Driving the vehicle....................... 94
2-4. Using other driving 
systems.................................... 127
Starting the hybrid system....... 101
Cruise control .............................. 127
Transmission ................................. 104
Turn signal lever .......................... 108
Dynamic radar cruise 
control ........................................ 130
Parking brake............................... 109
Intuitive parking assist ............. 139
2-1. Driving procedures.................. 94
Rear view monitor system ...... 158
2-2. Instrument cluster.................... 110
Gauges and meters ................... 110
Indicators and warning 
lights................................................ 114
Multi-information display.......... 117
2-3. Operating the lights and 
windshield wipers................. 120
AVS (Adaptive Variable 
Suspension System)................. 161
Driving assist systems................ 162
PCS (Pre-Collision 
System) ........................................ 167
2-5. Driving information................ 170
Cargo and luggage.................... 170
Headlight switch......................... 120
Vehicle load limits ....................... 173
Fog light switch............................ 123
Winter driving tips ...................... 174
Windshield wipers and 
washer........................................... 124
Trailer towing................................. 179
Dinghy towing ............................. 180
Headlight cleaner switch ........ 126
93
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the hybrid system (P. 101)
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.

(P. 104)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 109)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to “P”.
(P. 104)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 109)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to “P”.
(P. 104)
STEP 4 Stop the hybrid system.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
Starting on a steep incline
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
94
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
2
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 482)
■ For efficient use
● Put the shift lever into “D” when driving
In the “N” position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will be discharged requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge.
● Drive your vehicle smoothly
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the traction motor without having to use
gasoline engine power.
● Avoid repeated acceleration
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power,
resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with
the accelerator pedal slightly released.
● Put the shift lever into “P” when parking
In the “N” position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the “N” position for an extended period of the time may
discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.
■ When starting on an incline
The hill-start assist control may operate. (P. 162)
95
When driving
•
•
•
•
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. 
Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
● The driver should pay attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only
by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the
pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.
Doing so may cause the hybrid system not to operate or lead to poor brake and
steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. 
Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and eventually, death. Have the cause of the problem inspected immediately.
96
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to “P”, “R” or “N” while the
vehicle is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission and may result in a
loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake not to operate properly and lead to an
accident.
The brake actuator will not operate properly if the hybrid system is off.
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill. 
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 106)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
● Be careful when driving on slippery surfaces, as the vehicle may spin or skid when
downshifting, rapidly accelerating, braking or turning.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
97
When driving
● Do not turn the hybrid system off while driving. 
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the hybrid system.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than “P” or “N” the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. 
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the hybrid system is operating to
prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Failure to do so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the hybrid system
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or immedi-
ately after turning the hybrid system off. 
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build up, or where
snow is expected to fall. 
Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle and cause gas poisoning.
98
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. 
Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or press the accelerator
pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to abnormal hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
fumes may enter the vehicle and cause gas poisoning.
■ When braking the vehicle
2
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
● If the brake actuator does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and
avoid downhill or sharp turns that require making. 
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the hybrid system is not operating. 
Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved brake fluid pressure.
● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
99
When driving
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together
to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time. 
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brake only: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced
front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional
brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you
also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
that of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 459)
100
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting the hybrid system
Modes can be switched by pressing the power switch when carrying the
electronic key on your person. (The hybrid system can be started in any
mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing the brake
pedal.)
■ Changing power switch mode
“OFF” mode
“ACC” mode
2
When driving
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
“IG-ON” mode
All electrical components can
be used.
■ Starting the hybrid system
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
STEP 3 Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
STEP 4 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The power switch indicator turns green.
STEP 5
Press the power switch.
After a few seconds, the
“READY” light will flash and
come on with a beep sound.
The vehicle can move when the
“READY” light is on, even if the
engine is stopped.
101
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If the hybrid system does not start
The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 62)
■ When the power switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ If the “READY” light does not come on
If the “READY” light does not come on when you press the power switch with the
shift lever in “P” and the brake pedal pressed, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Auto power OFF function
The power switch will automatically turn OFF when left in “ACC” mode for 1 hour or
more.
■ When the ambient temperature is low
Such as during winter driving conditions, it may take time until the “READY” light
comes on.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 4
■ When the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 444
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 18
■ When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 393
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 16
■ Leak detection pump
Several hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear a sound coming
from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. This is normal
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
102
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the
accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
Do not touch the power switch while driving. 
Pressing and holding the power switch will stop the hybrid system, which may lead
to an accident.
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode for long periods without
the hybrid system on.
■ When starting the hybrid system
● Do not race the hybrid system.
● If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have the hybrid system checked
immediately.
103
2-1. Driving procedures
Transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
While the power switch
is in “IG-ON” mode,
depress the brake pedal
and move the shift lever.
104
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Function
P
Parking the vehicle or starting the hybrid system
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
“S” mode driving*2 (P. 106)
2
When driving
*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
“D” position for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using “S” mode, you can control engine braking
forces.
■ Selecting a driving mode
The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and
operating conditions.
Power mode
For powerful acceleration and
driving in mountainous regions.
Normal mode
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving on
slippery road surfaces, such as
on snow.
Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode.
105
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in “S” mode
Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “5”.
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
● If you accelerate while in ranges “1” to “5”, the shift range may automatically range up in accordance with the vehicle's speed.
■ Downshifting restrictions in “S” mode
The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded. (The
warning buzzer will sound twice in this situation.)
106
Downshifting
Maximum speed
mph (km/h)
54
108 (173)
43
78 (125)
32
58 (94)
21
34 (55)
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When in heavy traffic
To avoid running the hybrid battery (traction battery) down, leave the shift lever in
“D” or “S”.
■ When driving with the cruise control system (or dynamic radar cruise control sys-
tem)
The engine brake will not operate in the “S” mode, even when downshifting to “5” or
“4”. (P. 127, 130)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
2
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
P. 467
■ If the
indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to “S”
This may indicate a malfunction in the transmission. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately. 
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in “D”.)
107
When driving
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned to “ACC” or
“IG-ON” mode after driving in snow mode.
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Left turn
Right turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
108
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
U.S.A.
Canada
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully
depress the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the
brake pedal with your right
foot.
2
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
109
When driving
NOTICE
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target
region.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the power
switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
Power meter
Displays the instantaneous output from the hybrid system is approximate
kilowatts.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Multi-information display
P. 117
110
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
2
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights excluding the clock and outside temperature display, can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
Maximum brightness
111
When driving
Changes the display
Resets the trip meter driving
range to “0”.
2-2. Instrument cluster
Light sensitive optitron meter
To reduce glare or reflection of the instrument cluster, the cluster glass is
tinted automatically or manually. You can select a setting from 7 modes.
Display the present setting, then
change the mode.
To change the mode, press the button once and then again within 6
seconds.
Each time you press the button, the
mode changes in the following
order;
1. “AUTO - Norm”
2. “AUTO - Lo”
3. “AUTO - Hi”
4. “MANUAL - 1”
5. “MANUAL - 2”
6. “MANUAL - 3”
7. “MANUAL - 4”
Mode 1 to 3: The cluster glass tint
will be adjusted automatically
depending on the intensity of sunlight in the surrounding.
Mode 4 to 7: The cluster glass tint
will be fixed when a certain level of
sunlight is reached in the surrounding.
(“Norm” to “Hi”, “1” to “4” referring
to the level of cluster glass tint.)
112
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the
red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Check the
engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 475)
■ To activate the light sensitivity function properly
Do not affix a sticker or window tint to the rear window glass, or put an object
behind the rear seat.
2
When driving
113
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.
Center panel
114
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
(Canada)
“Hybrid PWR” indicator
(P. 105)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 120)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 127)
Headlight indicator
(P. 120)
Damping mode indicator
(P. 161)
Tail light indicator
(P. 120)
* “AFS OFF” indicator 
Fog light indicator
(P. 123)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator (P. 140)
Shift position and shift
range indicators 
(P. 106)
“Hybrid SNOW” indicator
(P. 105)
2
When driving
(U.S.A.)
Turn signal indicator 
(P. 108)
(P. 121)
(if equipped)
*
Slip indicator (P. 163)
Driving ready indicator
(P. 101)
115
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated
vehicle’s systems. (P. 430)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
*
(Canada)
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(U.S.A.)
*
(Canada)
*
*
(Canada)
*
*
(if equipped)
*
*: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to “IG-ON” mode
to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off
after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not
come on when you turn to “IG-ON” mode, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.
116
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the status of the hybrid system.
● Energy monitor
(P. 6)
Displays the status of the hybrid
system.
● Trip information
(P. 118)
2
When driving
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising
related information.
● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) (P. 141)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) 
(P. 130)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise control.
● Warning messages
(P. 436)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
117
2-2. Instrument cluster
Display items can be switched
by pushing the “DISP” switch.
Trip information
■ Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel
consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled.
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
118
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid
system was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch
for longer than one second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
2
■ System check display
CAUTION
■ The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
119
When driving
The “HYBRID SYNERGY DRIVE” message is displayed 3 seconds after the
power switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode. At this time a systems check is conducted, and the normal display is shown upon successful completion of this check.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
U.S.A.
Canada
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights and all the
lights listed above turn
on and off automatically.
(When the power switch
is in “IG-ON” mode.)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
120
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System)
AFS improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically
adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the
degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■ Deactivating AFS
Press the switch to turn it OFF.
■ Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking
brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. 
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
121
When driving
The
indicator turns on when
the AFS is deactivated.
2
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Automatic light off system
The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened or closed if
the power switch has been switched to “ACC” or turned “OFF” while the headlights
are turned on. (The lights turn off immediately if the button on the key is pressed
after all doors are locked.)
To turn the lights on again, switch to “IG-ON” mode, or turn the light switch “OFF”
once and then back to the
or
position.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ If the
indicator flashes...
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (P. 500)
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
122
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
OFF
ON
2
When driving
123
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts
wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Sensor sensitivity (low)
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
Wash/wipe operation
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph
(170 km/h).
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.
With “LO” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
124
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Rain drop sensor
The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
2
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
■ In extremely hot or cold weather
The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 176F
[80C]) or cold (at less than 14F [-10C]).
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. (P. 500)
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
125
When driving
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when
When the power switch is in “IG-ON” mode and the headlight switch is turned
ON.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the
washer fluid pump to overheat.
126
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
■ Set the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Turn the “ON-OFF” button ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
2
When driving
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set the cruise
control speed.
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set speed
(approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/
h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and
releasing it.
127
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brake pedal is
depressed.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the “D” or “4”, “5”, or “6” range of “S”.
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph
(200 km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system. 
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
128
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
● In heavy traffic
When driving
● On roads with sharp bends
2
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
● On winding roads
129
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
■ Select cruise mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Turn the “ON-OFF” button
ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Turn the “ON-OFF” button
ON.
Switch to constant speed
control mode.
(Push and hold for approximately 1 second.)
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when
the power switch is switched to
“IG-ON” mode.
130
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set.
2
When driving
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is displayed.
In the constant speed control
mode, fine adjustment of the set
speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by
lightly pressing the lever up or
down and releasing it.
■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when depressing the brake
pedal.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
131
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Preceding
vehicle mark
Each pull of the switch changes
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is automatically set to the long
mode when the power switch is
set to the “IG-ON” mode.
A vehicle mark is displayed
ahead if one is detected.
132
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your
vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.
2
When driving
Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles
ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving
slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph
(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you on the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
133
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower
than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and
the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving
slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to
62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/
h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (P. 440)
■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
● The shift lever is in “D” or the “4”, “5” or “6” range of “S”.
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 27 mph (43 km/h) and 87 mph (139
km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
134
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed
● The mode select switch is set to snow mode
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way
2
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatically canceling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 218 ft. (66 m)
Medium
Approximately 148 ft. (45 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
135
When driving
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the “ON-OFF”
button on again.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
136
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■ To avoid operating the dynamic radar cruise control by mistake
2
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
● Where buzzer can be heard often
137
When driving
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (P. 447) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Stick or attach anything to them
● Leave them dirty
● Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks
● Modify or paint them
● Replace them with non-genuine parts
138
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
Intuitive parking assist uses sensors in the front and rear of the vehicle to
detect the distance between the vehicle and any obstacles, and informs the
driver of this distance using the multi-information display, the touch screen,
and warning beeps.
The system may be used at speeds less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
■ Sensor types
2
When driving
Dual sensors
There are 4 sensors installed in the front bumper, two in the center section
to detect obstacles directly ahead, and one in each corner of the bumper,
to detect obstacles in those areas.
The dual sensors detect obstacles ahead of the vehicle, and judge whether
avoidance maneuvers are necessary (whether the obstacle will come
within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle), according to the distance between
the obstacle and the vehicle, and the steering wheel position. The screen
display and beeps will change accordingly.
Rear corner sensors
These sensors detect obstacles around the rear corners of the vehicle.
Back sensors
These sensors detect obstacles behind the vehicle.
139
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Intuitive parking assist switch
Press the intuitive parking assist switch to turn the system on/off.
The indicator light will come
on when the intuitive parking
assist is turned ON.
You can use the system if the
power switch is in the “IG-ON”
mode.
If intuitive parking assist is ON,
the system will operate under
the following conditions;
• The dual sensors will operate if the shift lever is in a
position other than “R” or
“P”.
• All corner sensors and the
back sensors will operate if
the shift lever is in “R”.
140
2-4. Using other driving systems
Multi-information display and touch screen
If the sensors detect an obstacle, it is displayed on the multi-information
display in the instrument cluster.
You can change the conditions under which information is displayed on
the touch screen. (P. 153)
Multi-information display
Dual sensor detection
Steering guide symbol
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
2
When driving
Touch screen
Dual sensor detection
Steering guide symbol
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
If the intuitive parking assist is
operated while the rear view monitor is showing, the intuitive parking
assist will be shown in the upper
right corner of the screen. 
(P. 144)
141
2-4. Using other driving systems
Display distance and beeps
When the intuitive parking assist is activated, the approximate distance to
the obstacle is displayed. Also, if an obstacle with which a collision is possible is detected, a warning beep will sound.
■ Dual sensor detection display and obstacle distance
Approximate
distance to
obstacle
3.0 ft. (100 cm)
to 1.5 ft. (50 cm)
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
Less than 0.8 ft.
(25 cm)
Touch screen
Multi-information display
With beeps
(danger of
collision)
No beeps
(no danger of
collision)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)

(blinking)
(continuous)
• If the shift lever is in “R”, only the corner sensors will detect obstacles.
142
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Rear corner sensor detection display and obstacle distance
Approximate distance
to obstacle
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft.
(37.5 cm)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.
(25 cm)
Touch screen
(continuous)
(continuous)
2
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
When driving
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.
(25 cm)
Multi-information
display
■ Back sensor detection display and obstacle distance
Approximate distance
to obstacle
5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0
ft. (60 cm)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft.
(45 cm)
1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft.
(35 cm)
Multi-information
display
Touch screen
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
143
2-4. Using other driving systems
Touch screen (insert display)
Dual sensor (corner) detection
Rear corner sensor detection
Back sensor detection
The tire display and the steering
guide symbol will not be displayed.
■ Dual sensor detection display and obstacle distance
Approximate distance
to obstacle
3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft.
(50 cm)
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft.
(37.5 cm)
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.
(25 cm)
Less than 0.8 ft. (25
cm)
144
With beeps
(danger of collision)
No beeps
(no danger of collision)
(blinking slowly)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(blinking rapidly)
(continuous)

(continuous)
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Rear corner sensor detection display and obstacle distance
Approximate distance to obstacle
Touch screen
1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)
(blinking)
2
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(blinking rapidly)
When driving
1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
(continuous)
■ Back sensor detection display and obstacle distance
Approximate distance to obstacle
Touch screen
5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(blinking slowly)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft. (45 cm)
(blinking)
1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(blinking rapidly)
Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(continuous)
145
2-4. Using other driving systems
Steering guide symbol
Displays the steering maneuvers required to avoid an obstacle. Move the
steering wheel in the direction shown by the arrow.
Multi-information display
Touch screen
• The steering guide symbol only shows the maneuvers necessary to avoid an
obstacle.
• When using the system, always check your surroundings for safety.
146
2-4. Using other driving systems
Beeps and obstacle distance
A beep sounds when an obstacle with which there is a danger of collision
is detected. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the interval of
the beep becomes shorter.
● When the following obstacle distances are reached, the beep changes
from intermittent to continuous:
● If obstacles are detected by the dual sensors in 2 places at once, or if
both rear corner sensors detect obstacles at the same time, the system
will sound a warning beep for the closer of the 2 obstacles.
● If multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the vehicle at the
same time, the warning beep will change in the following manner:
• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear
of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is
detected near a different area of the vehicle, the warning beep will sound
6 beeps then one continuous beep.
• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear
of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is
detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warning beeps will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.
● You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (P. 153)
147
2
When driving
• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the dual sensors or rear corner
sensors is less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm).
• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the back sensors is less than 1.1
ft. (35 cm).
2-4. Using other driving systems
Obstacle detection range
About 10.0 ft. (300 cm)
About 3.0 ft. (100 cm)
About 5.0 ft. (150 cm)
About 1.5 ft. (50 cm)
The detection area of the sensors is
shown to the left.
If obstacles move too close to the
sensors, they will not be detected.
If the malfunction screen is displayed, the dual sensor detection
range will be shortened from 3.0 ft.
(100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm).
148
2-4. Using other driving systems
If there is snow or mud on a sensor
2
When driving
Multi-information display
Touch screen
The same symbol will appear on the insert display.
The location of the affected sensor is displayed. Wipe off whatever is
stuck to the sensor. (The above illustration shows something on the left
front sensor.)
If the “CLEAN SONAR” message is displayed even though the sensor is
not dirty or you have already cleaned it, there is most likely a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
149
2-4. Using other driving systems
If a sensor is malfunctioning
Multi-information display
Touch screen
The same symbol will appear on the insert display.
The location of the malfunctioning sensor is displayed. (The above illustration shows a malfunctioning left front sensor.) Have the vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.
150
2-4. Using other driving systems
If the steering neutral position is unknown
After the 12 volt battery has been reconnected, the steering sensor will
need to be initialized. At this time, if the dual sensors detect an obstacle,
the steering guide symbol and both arrows will be displayed.
2
When driving
Multi-information display
Touch screen
Use one of the following methods to initialize the steering sensor.
• With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left,
then the right. (The order is not important.)
• Drive for more than 5 minutes on an un-crowded road with as few
curves and corners as possible.
If the steering guide symbol disappears, the steering sensor has been initialized. If the steering guide symbol does not disappear, have the vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.
151
2-4. Using other driving systems
If the steering information is not being correctly received
If the system is unable to receive signals from the steering sensor, or there
is a malfunction in the VGRS, the steering guide symbol and both arrows
will flash if the dual sensors detect an obstacle.
In this case, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
Multi-information display
Touch screen
If the steering guide symbol is on or flashing, the intuitive parking assist
maximum detection range is reduced from 3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50
cm).
The steering sensor malfunction warning display will be aligned with the
intuitive parking assist detection display or the intuitive parking assist malfunction warning display.
152
2-4. Using other driving systems
Warning beep volume and touch screen settings
You can change the warning beep volume and touch screen operating
conditions.
Push
to display the “Information” screen. Then touch
.
●
●
2
.
: Displays if maneuvers are required to avoid an obstacle (if
an obstacle is likely to come within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle).
: Does not display the intuitive parking assist detection
screen.
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor is in use, the warnhas been
ing indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even
selected.
153
When driving
■ Changing the warning beep volume
STEP 1 Touch
.
STEP 2 Adjust the beep volume, then touch
.
■ Changing the touch screen operating conditions
STEP 1 Touch
.
STEP 2 Set one of the following operating condition, then touch
●
: Displays when the sensors detect an obstacle.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ When the system malfunctions
● If a malfunction occurs and no obstacles have been detected, a warning is dis-
played, and a malfunction beep sounds for 7 seconds.
If an obstacle has been detected, or another malfunction occurs in a different
sensor, the malfunction beeps will not sound.
● In the following circumstances the displayed warning will disappear:
• If you switch the screen to a different mode.
• If you turn OFF the intuitive parking assist main switch.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). Once the vehicle speed drops
below 6 mph (10 km/h), the warning will be displayed again.
● If the malfunction screen is displayed, the detection range of the dual sensors is
shortened. In this case, the necessity for obstacle evasion (whether the obstacle
will come within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle or not) will not be calculated.
■ When using intuitive parking assist
● The sensors' detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving for-
ward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides
of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
• The sensors' detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front
and rear bumpers.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at
slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. (25
cm) of the vehicle before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• Braking distance may differ according to the road conditions (rain, gravel
etc.).
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air
flow noise of air conditioning system.
• For long obstacles such as walls, the obstacle warning may change as the
obstacle gets closer.
154
2-4. Using other driving systems
● In the following situations, the intuitive parking assist may not function correctly,
possibly leading to an accident.
■ Obstacles that may not be detected correctly
The following obstacles may not be detected.
•
•
•
•
•
Thin objects such as wire, fencing or rope.
Objects that absorb sound waves, such as cotton or snow.
Objects with sharp corners.
Objects where the upper section projects out over the lower section.
Low objects.
155
2
When driving
• There is ice, snow or mud on the sensors. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor area is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The vehicle angle is especially wide.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• When driving on bumpy, sloped or gravel roads, or over grass.
• If there is something producing ultrasonic waves nearby, such as another
vehicle’s horn, motorcycle engine noise, air braking sound from heavy-duty
vehicles, or another vehicle using the intuitive parking assist.
• In heavy rain, or if water is splashed on the sensors.
• If a commercial fender pole or radio antenna is installed.
• If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.
• If moving towards a high curb or a curb corner.
• Objects such as signs may cause the detection distance to shorten.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially,
but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
To reduce the chance of injury in the event of an accident or sudden stop, keep the
switch box closed.
■ When using intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
● The back sensors and rear corner sensors do not judge whether there is danger
of a collision, nor whether the obstacle can be avoided using the steering wheel.
When reversing, always check your surroundings and behind the vehicle for
safety.
● The steering guide symbol (arrow) is an approximate guide regarding obstacles.
It is not driving instructions. When moving forward or reversing, always check
your surroundings for safety and drive carefully.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors' detection areas, as this may cause
the intuitive parking assist to function incorrectly, possibly leading to an accident.
156
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■ When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor
malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ When changing tires
If you install tires of a size other than that recommended by the manufacturer, the
system will be unable to correctly detect steering wheel movement. Always use tire
sizes recommended by the manufacturer.
■ When washing the vehicle
When washing the vehicle using high pressure cleaning equipment, do not spray
water directly on the sensors. Subjecting the sensors to high pressure impact may
cause a malfunction.
157
2
When driving
• A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch ON.
• The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sound when
no obstacle has been detected.
• If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong
impact.
• If the bumper collides with something.
• If the display shows continuously without a beep.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.
Rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in “R”.
If you move the lever out of “R”,
the screen returns to the previous one.
■ Displayed area
The area covered by the camera is limited.
Objects which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot be
seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
Corner of bumper
158
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Rear view monitor system camera
In the following cases, it may be difficult to
see the images on the screen, even when the
system is functioning correctly.
■ Smear effect
If a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by
the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the
camera may occur.
*: Smear effect—A phenomenon that occurs
when a bright light (for example, sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have a
vertical streak above and below it.
159
2
When driving
• In the dark (e.g. at night).
• If the temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
• If water droplets get on the camera, or
when humidity is high (e.g. when it rains).
• If foreign matter (e.g. snow or mud) get
on the camera lens.
• If the sun or headlights are shining directly
into the camera lens.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe these precautions to avoid an
accident that could result in death or serious injuries.
● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-
tances.
● Do not use the system if the trunk is open.
■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
● If the back of the vehicle is hit, the camera's position and mounting angle may
change. Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in
cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
when the system is cold.
160
2-4. Using other driving systems
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System)
AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions.
Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steering wheel operation in conjunction with VGRS, EPS and active stabilizer
suspension system.
Sports mode
For winding mountain road driving or high speed driving.
2
Normal mode
When driving
For normal driving.
161
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Restrains the vehicle from slipping when driving on slick road surfaces or
in the event of sudden braking.
■ BA (Brake Assist)
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when
starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■ Hill-start assist control
Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an
incline or slippery slope. It operates for approximately 5 seconds at maximum.
■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)
Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement.
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
■ Active stabilizer suspension system
Turns at smaller angles to maintain the stable vehicle posture.
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control, VGRS and EPS systems.
Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes, engine output, and the movement of the front
wheels.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 167
2
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when
starting on an incline, or if the rear
wheels spin, the slip indicator light
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system is operating.
The slip indicator light flashes as
well when ABS is operating.
163
When driving
When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC may reduce power
from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to
enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Push the button to turn off TRAC.
The slip indicator light should come
on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
Once you turn the power switch
“OFF”, TRAC will be activated
automatically.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
TRAC is reactivated when vehicle speed exceeds 30 mph (50 km/h) even if
“TRAC OFF” has been turned off.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, BA, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist con-
trol and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid system is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ Hill-start assist control is operational when
● The shift lever is in the “D” or “S” position.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ VGRS is disabled in the following situations
● During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while
driving at lower speeds.
● After the hybrid system is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).
■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when
there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel
may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system OFF. The system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or
serious injury:
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC is operating. 
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
165
When driving
CAUTION
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively when
● On steep inclines.
● On icy surfaces.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the
VDIM, and may cause the system to malfunction.
166
2-4. Using other driving systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.
■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only)
The seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is
increased (P. 44), to provide even greater constraining force to protect
the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the
system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected.
2
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When driving
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■ Pre-collision AVS
If the system determines that the collision is unavoidable, the operation of
AVS (P. 161) helps prevent the vehicle front from going down when hard
brakes are applied.
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,
trees, or snowdrifts.
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Brake Assist
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● AVS
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 432, 439)
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
169
2
When driving
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
170
2-5. Driving information
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (P. 173)
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
2
When driving
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 815 lb. (370 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
815 lb. — 366 lb. = 449 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
449 lb. — 388 lb. = 61 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
171
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Storage precautions
● Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. 
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.
● Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel. 
They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident
they may injure the vehicle occupants.
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-
one during an accident or sudden braking.
■ Weight of the load
● Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control result-
ing in an accident which may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
172
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 815 lb. (370 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
2
When driving
Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do
not exceed the total load capacity.
■ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. 
(P. 385)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
173
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/inverter coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
● Tire inflation pressure falls in winter as the outside temperature
falls. Add 2.8 to 4.3 psi (20 to 30 kPa, 0.2 to 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
to the standard tire inflation pressure.
174
2-5. Driving information
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
2
When driving
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released.
175
2-5. Driving information
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
● Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial
cable chains or V-bar type chains.
• Install the chains on the rear tires.
• Refer to the explanation that comes with the tire chains for installation instructions.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
Shifting the windshield wiper position
You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or
icy condition etc.)
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper
position.
To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
176
2-5. Driving information
To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the upper part of the hook section.
2
When driving
■ Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. 
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the specified level of tire inflation pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
177
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. 
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
178
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
2
When driving
179
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
180
Interior features
3-1. Using the touch screen ......... 182
Touch screen ................................ 182
Setting the touch screen ......... 185
3-2. Using the air conditioning 
system and defogger............ 191
Automatic air conditioning 
system ........................................... 191
Rear window and outside rear 
view mirror defoggers ............... 199
3-3. Using the audio system ....... 200
Audio system type ................... 200
Using the radio........................... 203
Using the cassette player........ 212
Using the CD player................. 216
Playing MP3 and WMA 
discs ............................................. 224
Using the DVD player ............ 232
Playing DVD video/audio...... 235
Playing video CD...................... 248
DVD player and DVD video 
disc information ...................... 252
Optimal use of the audio/
video system............................. 256
Using the steering 
switches...................................... 260
3-4. Using the hands-free 
system ..................................... 263
Hands-free system.................... 263
3
Using the Bluetooth® 
phone .......................................... 268
Setting the hands-free 
system.......................................... 281
3-5. Using the interior lights ....... 307
Interior lights list ........................ 307
3-6. Using the storage features ... 311
List of storage features .............. 311
3-7. Other interior features......... 317
Sun visors ....................................... 317
Vanity mirror ................................ 318
Clock............................................... 319
Outside temperature 
display......................................... 320
Ashtrays ......................................... 321
Cigarette lighter........................ 322
Power outlet ................................ 323
Seat heaters ............................... 324
Seat heaters and 
ventilators ................................. 326
Armrest......................................... 328
Rear sunshade............................ 329
Floor mats ..................................... 331
Trunk features ............................. 332
Garage door opener............... 334
Compass ....................................... 339
181
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system
and air-conditioning, adjust the screen display etc.
Vehicles with navigation system
Vehicles without navigation system
The “Information” screen shown in the above illustration is displayed when
the
182
is pressed.
3-1. Using the touch screen
Switches
Page
P. 191
“AUDIO”
P. 200
“INFO” (Displaying the “Information” screen)
P. 182
“DISP” (Adjusting the display)
P. 186
Trip Information. (Displaying the
“Trip Information” screen)
P. 6
Maintenance
Navigation System Owner's Manual
Telephone
P. 268
Calendar
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“LEXUS Park Assist”
P. 153
Language
P. 185
Screen Setting
P. 188
Adjust Clock
P. 319/
Navigation System Owner's Manual
3
Interior features
“CLIMATE”
The initial screen
If the power switch is set to “ACC” or
“IG-ON” mode, the initializing screen
will be displayed for a few seconds as
the system starts up.
183
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ To avoid damaging the touch screen
● Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is no response, remove your fin-
ger from the screen and try again.
● Remove any dirt on the screen by wiping with a soft cloth. Do not use detergent.
■ When using the touch screen
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.
Change your angle of viewing, or remove your sunglasses.
184
3-1. Using the touch screen
Setting the touch screen
You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.
Language settings
The language used for all voice guidance, messages and touch screen
switches may be changed.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
Select the desired language.
STEP 3
3
Touch
Interior features
STEP 4
.
Turning off the beep sound
The beep that sounds when a touch screen button is touched can be
turned off.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
Touch
.
185
3-1. Using the touch screen
Adjusting the display
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
Adjust the display as desired using
/
and
/
If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to
the previous screen.
Vehicles with DVD player
Vehicles with CD player
186
/
/
Color
Red
Green
Tone
Lighter
Darker
Contrast
Weaker
Stronger
Brightness
Darker
Brighter
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ “Day Mode”
When the headlights are turned on, the
screen dims. However the screen can be
switched to “Day Mode”.
The screen will stay in “Day Mode” when
the headlights are turned on until
touched again.
is
If the instrument panel light control is set to
“MAX”, “Day Mode” is not displayed.
■ To turn off the picture display
If
is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice only.
3
Interior features
187
3-1. Using the touch screen
Screen settings
The following screen settings can be changed.
Automatic transition
20 seconds after air-conditioning
or audio system use, the system will
return the display to the previous
screen.
Switch color
You can select the switch color.
Personal data deletion
The following personal data is
deleted:
• User selection settings
• Phone book data
• Dialed numbers and received
calls
• Speed dial
• Bluetooth® phone data
• Security code
• Maintenance conditions*
• Maintenance information “off”
setting*
• Memory points*
• Areas to avoid*
• Previous points*
• Route trace*
*: If the navigation system is
equipped
188
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ Setting automatic transition
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Press
.
on the “Information” screen.
or
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
.
■ Setting the switch color
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Press
.
on the “Information” screen.
or
3
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
.
Interior features
STEP 1
■ To delete personal data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
on the “Information” screen.
Touch the
on the “Screen Setting” screen.
Touch
.
STEP 3
STEP 4
.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once initialized.
189
3-1. Using the touch screen
■ When deleting personal data
Data can only be deleted when the vehicle is stopped.
■ When selling the vehicle
Be sure to initialize both the call history and personal data. (P. 188)
■ If you touch the
The display returns to the previous screen.
190
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press
to display the air conditioning operation screen.
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Airflow display
Dual operation switch
Passenger’s side 
temperature 
display
Driver’s side 
temperature display
3
Fan speed display
Driver's side 
temperature control
Interior features
Air conditioning 
ON/OFF switch
Passenger’s side 
temperature control
Off
Outside air or recirculated mode
Automatic mode
Windshield defogger
Micro dust and pollen removal mode
The above illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the navigation system. The position of
may differ slightly for vehicles not equipped
with the navigation system.
191
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic mode.
Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated
air modes.
STEP 3
Press  to increase the temperature and  to decrease the temperature on the
.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press  to increase the temperature and  to decrease the temperature on the
.
Press  (increase) or  (decrease) on the
to separately adjust the
temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Touch
to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting
(simultaneous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous
modes each time
is touched.
192
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Touch any switch of
operating screen.
Press
(decrease increase) on the
to turn the fan off.
■ Changing the air outlets
Touch any mode on the operating
screen.
3
*: Only in the automatic mode
193
Interior features
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn OFF
automatically approximately 3
minutes later.
To stop the operation, press
again.
194
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
until the smog sensor screen appears while the
vehicle is stopped.
Touch
any
switch
of
(lower sensitivity  higher sensitivity) on the
operating screen.
3
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
195
Interior features
Center outlets
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
Rear seat outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
196
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.
● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm
or cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Window defogger feature
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
■ When the indicator light on
(outside air) mode in situ-
is touched.
flashes
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
Touch
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light
continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the air conditioning is OFF, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO”
mode ON will activate the air conditioning system.
■ Micro dust and pollen removal mode
● When the outside air is cold, the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
197
Interior features
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
■ Outside temperature approaches 32F (0C).
3
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when
the hybrid system is off.
198
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press the button.
Press the button to turn on the
rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers. The
defoggers will automatically
turn off after approximately 15
minutes. Pressing the button
again also turns the defoggers
off.
3
Interior features
■ Operating conditions
The power switch must be in the “IG-ON” mode.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Turn the defoggers off when the hybrid system is off.
199
3-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type
CD and (optional) DVD player with changer, cassette player, and AM/
FM radio
This illustration below is for a vehicle not equipped with the DVD
player.
Vehicles with navigation system
Vehicles without navigation system
The audio system appearance and screen may differ slightly for vehicles equipped with the DVD player.
200
3-3. Using the audio system
CD player:
Plays audio CDs, CD text, MP3 discs and WMA discs.
DVD player:
Plays audio CDs, CD text, video CDs, MP3 discs,
WMA discs, DVD video discs and DVD audio discs.
Title
Page
P. 203
Using the cassette player
P. 212
Using the CD player
P. 216
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
P. 224
Using the DVD player
P. 232
Playing DVD video/audio
P. 235
Playing video CD
P. 248
DVD player and DVD video disc 
information
P. 252
Optimal use of the audio/video system
P. 256
Using the steering wheel switches
P. 260
3
Interior features
Using the radio
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
201
3-3. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. 
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the hybrid system off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio/video system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
202
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Press
or
to choose either an AM or FM band.
When you press
while listening to the radio, the following audio control screen appears.
Display audio control screen
3
Preset stations
Adjust the 
frequency
(AM, FM mode) or 
channel (SAT mode)
Power Volume
Preset tuning
Seek frequency
Scan for receivable stations
AMSAT/FM mode buttons
This illustration is a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.
203
Interior features
Scan for
receivable stations 
(AM mode only)
3-3. Using the audio system
Setting station presets (excluding XM® satellite radio)
STEP 1
Search for desired stations by turning the
 or  on
STEP 2
dial or pressing 
.
Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until you hear a
beep.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® satellite radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
AM station
STEP 1
Touch
appears.
on the screen or press
until “PSCAN”
Preset stations will be played for a few seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, touch
once again.
FM station
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
204
or press
Press
until “PSCAN” appears.
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
AM station
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen or press
.
“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be
played for a few seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, touch
once again.
FM station
or press
STEP 2
STEP 1
Press
.
“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be
played for a few seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
Touch
screen.
or
on the
205
Interior features
RDS (Radio Data System)
3
3-3. Using the audio system
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
● ROCK
● EASYLIS (Easy listening)
● CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
● R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
● INFORM (Information)
● RELIGION
● MISC (Miscellaneous)
● ALARM (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
STEP 2
Touch
on the screen or press  or  on
.
The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.
If no radio station of that type is found, “NOTHING” appears on the
screen.
■ Displaying radio text messages
Touch
on the screen.
If “MSG” appears on the screen, a
text message may be displayed.
206
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Traffic announcement
Touch
on the screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio will start seeking
any station broadcasting traffic
program information.
If no traffic program station is
found, “NOTHING” appears on
the display.
XM® satellite radio (if equipped)
■ Receiving XM® satellite radio
STEP 1
3
The display changes as follows
each time the switch is pressed.
AM  SAT1  SAT2  SAT3
STEP 2
Turn the
dial to select a desired channel from all the catego-
ries or press  or  on
to select a desired channel in the
current category.
■ Presetting XM® satellite radio channels
Select the desired channel. Touch one of the preset stations (1 - 6) and
hold it until you hear a beep.
■ Changing the channel category
Touch
or
on the screen.
207
Interior features
Press
until “SAT” appears
on the screen.
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Scanning XM® satellite radio channels
● Scanning channels in the current category
STEP 1
Touch
on the screen or press
.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
When the desired channel is reached, touch
the button once again.
● Scanning preset channels
STEP 2
STEP 1
Touch
on the screen or press
you hear a beep.
or press
and hold it until
“PSCAN” appears on the screen.
When the desired channel is reached, touch
or press
the button once again.
■ Displaying the title and artist name
Touch
on the screen.
STEP 2
The screen will display up to 16
characters.
Touch the button once again to
return to the previous screen.
208
3-3. Using the audio system
■ When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■ XM® satellite radio
The optional Lexus genuine satellite radio tuner and antenna allows you to receive
and play XM® satellite radio broadcasts. (Subscription is required. Not available in
Hawaii and Alaska.)*
For detailed information about XM® satellite radio or to subscribe, visit XM®
on the web at www.xmradio.com or call (800) 967-2346.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using the
dial, and the receiver's 8-character ID
number will appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® satellite radio.
*: Terms and services provided by XM® Radio are subject to change without
notice.
209
Interior features
● XM® subscriptions
3
3-3. Using the audio system
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to XM® satellite radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM® satellite radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose
“CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
210
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM® satellite
radio.
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
3-3. Using the audio system
---
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at (800) 967-2346 during the following
hours*.
Monday - Saturday: 7 a.m. - 2 a.m. Sunday: 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. Central Standard Time
*: Subject to change without notice.
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
211
3
Interior features
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the cassette player
Insert a cassette tape or press
When you press
trol screen appears.
with a tape inserted.
while listening to the tape, the following audio con-
Display audio control screen
Rewind
Fast forward
Repeat play
Change playback 
direction
Skip play
Noise reduction
Power Volume
Playback
Change playback 
direction
Track selection
Tape eject Tape slot
This illustration is a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.
212
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting a track
■ Skip a number of tracks at a time.
STEP 1
Press  on
.
Press  until the number you want
to skip appears.
STEP 2
9 tracks can be skipped at a time.
3
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press  on
.
Press  until the number you want
to rewind appears.
9 tracks can be rewound at a time.
Note that the number includes the
current track.
213
Interior features
■ Rewind a number of tracks at a time.
3-3. Using the audio system
Using Dolby® Noise Reduction
Touch
on the screen.
Reduces the level of noise for tapes recorded with Dolby NR only.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratoare
ries Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol
registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
■ Canceling noise reduction, skip play, repeat play, rewind and fast forward
To cancel
To cancel
,
and
and
: Touch the corresponding button on the screen.
: Touch the corresponding button on the screen or press
.
■ Auto-reverse feature
After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and
begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast
forwarding.
■ When the cassette player does not operate correctly due to the cassette record-
ing conditions
Forwarding to the beginning of a track, repeat, blank tape skip and fast-forward
may not be possible in the following situations:
● The interval between tracks is less than 3 seconds (beginning of track and
repeat playback) or less than 15 seconds (blank tape skip).
● When there is noise between 2 tracks.
● The beginning and end of subsequent tracks are not clearly defined.
■ Cleaning the cassette player
Cassette player components (heads, capstan, pinch rollers) should be cleaned at
least once a month using a cleaning tape to remove dirt and dust that can easily
build up.
■ Using long playing cassette tapes
Avoid using tapes with a length of more than 90 minutes, as the tape used is very
thin and may become tangled in the cassette player.
214
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ Cassette tapes that cannot be used
Do not use a cassette tape if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling
off. Such tapes may affect playing speed and may also get stuck in the player.
■ Cassette player precautions
● Store cassette tapes away from direct sunlight.
● Do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the cassette player.
● Do not apply oil to the cassette player.
3
Interior features
215
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Insert a CD or press
When you press
screen appears.
with a CD inserted.
while listening to a CD, the following audio control
Display audio control screen
Display track list
Select CD
Search playback
Repeat play
Random playback
Power Volume
CD slot
Select CD
Track selection
CD eject
CD load
Playback
This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
216
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading a CD
■ Loading a single CD
Press
.
STEP 2 When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a CD after the CD/DVD player door opens.
■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP 1
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
To cancel the operation, press the
or
button. If you do not
insert a CD within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
STEP 1 To select the CD to be ejected, touch the desired disc number (1 6) on the screen or press  or  on
.
Press
and remove the CD.
■ Ejecting all CDs
STEP 2
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, then remove the CDs.
217
3
Interior features
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a CD after the CD/DVD player door opens.
After inserting a CD, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next CD after the CD/DVD
door has opened.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all CDs.
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press  to move up and  to move down using
until the desired
track number appears on the screen.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold  or  on
.
■ Selecting a track from the track list
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen.
Touch the desired track number.
STEP 2
or
: changes the list by 6
track groups.
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■ Scanning a CD
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
218
Touch
once again when the desired track is reached.
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting a CD
■ To select a CD to play
Touch the desired disc number (1 - 6) on the screen or press  or  on
.
■ To scan loaded CDs
STEP 1 Touch and hold
on the screen until “DSCAN” appears.
The first 10 seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
STEP 2
Touch
once again when the desired CD is reached.
3
Random playback
Interior features
■ Current CD
Touch
on the screen.
Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled.
■ All CDs
Touch and hold
on the screen until “DRAND” appears.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order until the button is
touched once again.
Repeating a track or a disc
■ Repeating a track
Touch
on the screen.
■ Repeating a disc
Touch
on the screen and hold until “DRPT” appears.
219
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch
,
, or
on the screen once again.
■ Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
16 letters can be displayed.
■ Error messages
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not
rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
Message
220
Cause
Correction
Procedures
No CD
or
No Disc
There is no disc in the CD
Insert a disc
or DVD changer
CD X Check
or
DISC X Check
• The disc X is dirty or
damaged
• The disc X is inserted
upside down
• The disc X is not playable with the player
• Clean the disc
• Insert the disc correctly
• Confirm the disc is playable with the player
CD Error
or
DVD Error
• There is a malfunction
within the system
• Operation is stopped
due to a high temperature inside the player
• Eject the disc
• Eject the disc and allow
the player to cool down
NO MUSIC FILE
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc
Eject the disc
3-3. Using the audio system
■ CD compatibility
Audio CDs
Only audio CDs with the marks shown to the
left can be used.
The following products may not be playable
on your CD player.
● SACDs
● dts-CDs
● Copy-protected CDs
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
3
ods
Interior features
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
221
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or dual discs.
Doing so may damage the player and render the disc insert/eject function unusable.
● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
● Low-quality and deformed discs.
● Discs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have the
label peeled off.
222
3-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
● Do not insert more than one disc at a time.
3
Interior features
223
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Insert an MP3 or WMA disc or press
with a disc inserted.
When you press
during playback of the disc, the following audio control screen appears.
Display audio control screen
Display folder list
Select folder
Repeat play
Search playback
Random playback
Power Volume
CD slot
Select file
Select CD
Select file
CD eject
CD load
Playback
This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.
224
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading, ejecting and selecting MP3 and WMA discs
Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (P. 216)
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting a folder
Touch “FOLDER
ous/next folder.
” or “
” on the screen to select the previ-
■ Selecting a folder from the folder list
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen.
Touch the desired folder number.
STEP 2
or
: displays the details of
the file currently playing.
:
displays the file list.
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Touch and hold
on the screen until “FLDSCAN” appears. When
the desired folder is reached, touch
once again.
225
Interior features
:changes the list by 6
folder groups.
3
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn the
dial or press  or  on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting a file from the file list
STEP 1 Touch
on the screen to turn the folder list on.
Touch
on the folder list
STEP 2
screen.
STEP 3
Touch the desired file number.
or
: changes the list by 6
groups.
:
displays the folder list.
:
displays the details of
the file currently playing.
This function is available only when
the vehicle is not moving.
226
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Selecting a desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Touch
on the screen.
When the desired file is reached, touch
once again.
File repeat
Touch
on the screen.
Folder repeat
Touch and hold
on the screen until the “FLD RPT” appears.
Random playback
3
Interior features
■ To play files from a particular folder in random order
Touch
on the screen.
■ To play all the files on a disc in random order
Touch and hold
on the screen until the “FLD RAND” appears.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Touch
,
or
on the screen once again.
■ Error messages
P. 220
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
227
3-3. Using the audio system
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
*: Compatible with VBR
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
*: Only compatible with 2-channel playback
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc
is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
228
3-3. Using the audio system
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
229
3
Interior features
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 level 1, level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
3-3. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
230
3-3. Using the audio system
■ CD-R and CD-RW discs
● CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the “finalizing process” (a
process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
● It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or
dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.
● It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depend-
ing on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct
format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the
applications.)
● CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high
temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play damaged discs.
more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
● Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.
■ Unsuitable discs, and player precautions
P. 222
231
Interior features
● If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
3
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the DVD player (if equipped)
Insert a disc or press
with a disc inserted.
When you press
during the playback of the disc, the following audio/
video control screen appears.
Display audio/video control screen
Select disc
Disc slot
Select file
Power Volume
Change disc
Track, file and chapter
selection/fast forward/
rewind
Disc eject
Disc load
Playback
This illustration shows the audio system of a vehicle with the navigation
system.
232
3-3. Using the audio system
Loading a discs
■ Loading a single disc
Push
.
STEP 2 When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the DVD player door opens.
■ Loading multiple discs
STEP 1
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
To cancel the operation, press the
or
button. If you do not
insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
■ DVD hint screen
This screen appears when a DVD
video, DVD audio or video CD is
first selected with the power switch
in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.
Touch
once you have
read the message.
233
3
Interior features
STEP 4
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert
a disc after the DVD player door opens.
After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the DVD player
door has opened.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.
3-3. Using the audio system
Ejecting discs
■ Ejecting a disc
STEP 1 To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the
screen or press  or  on
.
Press
and remove the disc.
■ Ejecting all discs
STEP 2
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, then remove the discs.
Selecting a disc
■ To select a disc to play
Touch the desired disc on the
screen or press  or on
● Audio CD, CD textP. 216
● MP3/WMA discP. 224
● DVD video/audioP. 235
● Video CDP. 248
234
.
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing DVD video/audio
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON”
mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
■ Video control screen
Press
while the disc is playing, the following screen appears.
Return to video screen
3
Interior features
Change screen mode (P. 259)
235
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Control icon screen
Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching
video, the following screen appears.
DVD video mode
Return to top menu screen
Page 1
Menu control key
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Return to 
menu screen
Stop
Fast forward
Rewind
Page 2
Playback
Pause
Initial DVD setup
Return to 
page 1
Change angle
Search desired screen
Return to menu screen
Change subtitle language
Change audio language
If
appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.
236
3-3. Using the audio system
DVD audio mode
Return to top menu screen
Menu control key
Page 1
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Change the 
audio format
Stop
Fast forward
Rewind
Playback
Pause
Initial DVD setup
Select menu number
Interior features
Page 2
3
Return to 
page 1
Search 
desired screen
Change angle
Return to registered screen
Change subtitle language
Return to previous screen
Go to next screen
If
appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.
Fast forwarding/rewinding disc
Touch and hold
on
or
on the screen or press and hold  or 
until you hear a beep.
237
3-3. Using the audio system
Slow playback
Touch
are touching
and then touch
. Video is played slowly while you
.
Searching a desired screen
■ Searching by title (DVD video mode)
STEP 1 Touch
in the control icons.
STEP 2
Input the desired title number and
then touch
.
: deletes the last input
number.
: hides the icons. To display
the icons, touch
.
: returns
screen.
to
previous
■ Searching by group (DVD audio mode)
STEP 1 Touch
in the control icons.
Input the group number and then
STEP 2
touch
.
: deletes the last input
number.
: hides the icons. To display
the icons, touch
.
: returns
screen.
238
to
previous
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus
options)
STEP 1 Touch
in the control icons.
Input the desired bonus group
STEP 2
number on the group search
screen and touch
.
: deletes the number.
: returns to previous screen.
■ Searching by chapter/track
to select a chapter/track.
■ Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)
STEP 1 Touch
in the control icons.
Input the desired menu number on
STEP 2
the screen and touch
.
239
Interior features
Press  or  on
3
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the DVD menu
STEP 1
STEP 2
Touch
or
in the control icons.
Touch
if the menu control key does not appear on the
menu screen.
Touch , ,
or to select a
menu item, then touch
to
select.
: moves icons up or down.
: hides icons. To display
icons, touch
.
: returns
screen.
to
previous
Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to
another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is
an example.)
Changing the subtitle language
Touch
in the control icons.
Each time you touch the button,
the next available language is
selected.
: hides the control icons.
: returns to previous screen.
240
3-3. Using the audio system
Changing the audio language (DVD video only)
Touch
in the control icons.
Each time you touch the button,
the next available language is
selected.
: returns to previous screen.
Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)
Touch
3
in the control icons.
: returns to previous screen.
241
Interior features
Each time you touch the button,
the next available audio format is
selected.
3-3. Using the audio system
Changing the angle (If the angle option is available)
STEP 1
Touch
STEP 2
in the control icons.
Touch the
button.
Each time you touch the button,
the next available angle is selected.
: returns to previous screen.
Initial DVD setup
■ Displaying “Setup Menu” screen
STEP 1 Touch
in the control icons.
After you change the initial setSTEP 2
tings, touch
.
: restores default settings.
242
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Setting audio language
STEP 1 Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch
desired language code. (P. 244)
and input the
: returns to previous screen.
■ Setting subtitle language
STEP 1 Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch
desired language code. (P. 244)
and input the
3
: returns to previous screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, touch
desired language code. (P. 244)
and input the
: returns to previous screen.
■ Setting angle mark ON or OFF
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen. Each time you touch
the button, the multi angle mark on the screen turns on or off alternately.
243
Interior features
■ Setting menu language
STEP 1 Touch
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
STEP 2 Select the desired language.
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Parental lock
STEP 1 Touch
STEP 2
on the “Setup Menu” screen.
Input the 4-digit password and
then touch
.
If you enter wrong numbers, touch
to delete the numbers.
Touch
10 times to initialize
the personal code.
STEP 3
Select a parental level (1 - 8).
: returns to previous screen.
■ Entering a language code
If you touch
on the “Select Audio Language” screen, “Select
Subtitle Language” screen or “DVD Language” screen, you can select
a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is
available.
Input the 4-digit language code
and then touch
.
: deletes the last input digit.
: returns
screen.
244
to
previous
3-3. Using the audio system
● Language code
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
Japanese
0205
Byelorussian 0704
Scots-Gaelic
0514
English
0207
Bulgarian
0712
Galician
0618
French
0208
Bihari
0714
Guarani
0405
German
0209
Bislama
0721
Gujarati
0920
Italian
0214
Bengali
0801
Hausa
0519
Spanish
0215
Tibetan
0809
Hindi
2608
Chinese
0218
Breton
0818
Croatian
1412
Dutch
0301
Catalan
0821
Hungarian
1620
Portuguese
0315
Corsican
0825
Armenian
1922
Swedish
0319
Czech
0901
Interlingua
1821
Russian
0325
Welsh
0905
Interlingue
1115
Korean
0401
Danish
0911
Inupiak
0512
Greek
0426
Bhutani
0914
Indonesian
0101
Afar
0515
Esperanto
0919
Icelandic
0102
Abkhazian
0520
Estonian
0923
Hebrew
0106
Afrikaans
0521
Basque
1009
Yiddish
0113
Amharic
0601
Persian
1023
Javanese
0118
Arabic
0609
Finnish
1101
Georgian
0119
Assamese
0610
Fiji
1111
Kazakh
0125
Aymara
0615
Faroese
1112
Greenlandic
0126
Azerbaijani
0625
Frisian
1113
Cambodian
0201
Bashkir
0701
Irish
1114
Kannada
3
Interior features
1001
245
3-3. Using the audio system
Code
246
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
1119
Kashmiri
1415
Norwegian
1914
Shona
1121
Kurdish
1503
Occitan
1915
Somali
1125
Kirghiz
1513
(Afan) 
Oromo
1917
Albanian
1201
Latin
1518
Oriya
1918
Serbian
1214
Lingala
1601
Panjabi
1919
Siswati
1215
Laothian
1612
Polish
1920
Sesotho
1220
Lithuanian
1619
Pashto, 
Pushto
1921
Sundanese
1222
Latvian
1721
Quechua
1923
Swahili
1307
Malagasy
1813
Rhaeto-
Romance
2001
Tamil
1309
Maori
1814
Kirundi
2005
Telugu
1311
Macedonian 1815
Romanian
2007
Tajik
1312
Malayalam
1823
Kinyarwanda 2008
Thai
1314
Mongolian
1901
Sanskrit
2009
Tigrinya
1315
Moldavian
1904
Sindhi
2011
Turkmen
1318
Marathi
1907
Sangho
2012
Tagalog
1319
Malay
1908
Serbo-
Croatian
2014
Setswana
1320
Maltese
1909
Sinhalese
2015
Tonga
1325
Burmese
1911
Slovak
2018
Turkish
1401
Nauru
1912
Slovenian
2019
Tsonga
1405
Nepali
1913
Samoan
2020
Tatar
3-3. Using the audio system
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
2023
Twi
2209
Vietnamese
2515
Yoruba
2111
Ukrainian
2215
Volapük
2621
Zulu
2118
Urdu
2315
Wolof
2126
Uzbek
2408
Xhosa
■ Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player's region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 220
3
Interior features
247
3-3. Using the audio system
Playing video CD
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the
vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON”
mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.
■ Video control screen
Press
while the disc is playing, the following screen appears.
Returning to video screen
Changing screen mode (P. 259)
248
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Control icon screen
Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a
video CD, the following screen appears.
Search track
Page 1
Hide control icons
Go to page 2
Return to 
registered screen
3
Change sound-multiplex
Search next menu
Interior features
Search previous page
Page 2
Return to 
page 1
Pause
Fast forward
Rewind
Playback
If
appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation
relevant to that control is not permitted.
249
3-3. Using the audio system
Fast forwarding/rewinding the video CD
Touch and hold
 or  on
or
in the control icons or press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Slow playback
Touch
and then touch
played slowly while you are touching
in the control icons. Video is
.
Using the video CD menu
Touch
in the control icons.
Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu
items.
250
3-3. Using the audio system
Selecting a desired screen
■ Searching manually
Touch
on the screen, or press  or  on
or
until
the desired screen appears.
■ Searching by number
STEP 1
Touch
in the control icons.
STEP 2
Input the desired track number on
the screen and touch
.
: hides icons. To display
icons, touch
.
: returns
screen.
to
previous
Changing the sound-multiplex mode
Touch
of the control icons. The mode cycles through each time
the button is touched.
“Main”  “Sub”  “Main/Sub”
■ Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player's region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 220
251
3
Interior features
: deletes the last input
number.
3-3. Using the audio system
DVD player and DVD video disc information
■ DVD video discs
The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.
Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating
the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD video
disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player.
If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player,
“Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video
disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it.
■ Symbols shown on DVD video discs
Mark
Meaning
Indicates NTSC format.
Indicates the number of audio tracks.
Indicates the number of language subtitles.
Indicates the number of angles.
Indicates the screen display ratios available.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code.
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
252
3-3. Using the audio system
■ DVD compatibility
Audio CDs
Use only discs marked as shown to the left.
The following products may not be playable
on your DVD player.
● SACDs
● dts-CDs
● Copy-protected CDs
DVD video discs
● DVD-Rs
● DVD+Rs
● DVD-RWs
DVD audio discs
● DVD+RWs
3
● DVD-ROMs
Interior features
● DVD-RAMs
Video CDs
■ DVD video disc information
● DVD video discs
Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted
“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The
picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate
encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is
changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is
stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the
more advanced technology of DVD video.
253
3-3. Using the audio system
● Viewer restrictions
This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions
of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
● Multi-angle option
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
● Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
● Region codes
The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD
video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the DVD player. (P. 252)
● Audio
This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVD. Other decoded types cannot be played.
● Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by
title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.
254
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Sound
● Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights
owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
● DTS
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
System, Inc.
3
Interior features
■ Unsuitable discs, and player precautions
P. 222
CAUTION
■ DVD video precaution
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
255
3-3. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio/video system
Press
on the panel to display the audio/video control screen.
Operating the radio, cassette player and CD player
Adjust sound 
quality and balance
Adjust the DSP
Operating the DVD video/audio and video CD
Adjust sound 
quality and balance
Adjust screen ratio
Adjust the DSP
256
3-3. Using the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and balance
STEP 1
Touch
on the screen.
Adjust the settings, referring to the
following table.
STEP 2
Once you have finished, touch
.
Sound quality
mode
Display
Level
-5 to 5
Mid-pitched
tones*
-5 to 5
Low-pitched
tones*
-5 to 5
Front/rear
volume balance
F7 to R7
Left/right volume
balance
L7 to R7
Interior features
High-pitched
tones*
3
Touch
or
or
or
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio, cassette tape,
CD or DVD mode.
257
3-3. Using the audio system
Setting DSP
The following features can be set as desired by touching
screen.
With CD player
on the
With DVD player
■ Turning Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) ON or OFF
Touch
or
.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the
noise level as you drive your vehicle.
■ Changing the listening position (vehicles with CD player only)
The speaker balance can be changed to produce the best sound for
each listening position.
Touch
.
The listening position changes as follows each time the switch is
touched.
Display
Listening position
Position best suited to the driver's seat
Position best suited to the driver's and front passenger’s seat
258
3-3. Using the audio system
Display
Listening position
Position best suited to the rear seats
Position best suited to all seats
■ Turning the surround ON or OFF (with DVD player only)
Touch
or
.
Setting the screen ratio mode (with DVD player only)
STEP 1
Touch
3
on the screen.
Touch one of the
,
or
to
match screen ratio printed on the
DVD.
Screen ratio mode
Details
NORMAL
Suitable for 4:3 screen ratio
WIDE1
Expand the Normal screen 
horizontally to fill the display.
WIDE2
Suitable for 16:9 screen ratio
259
Interior features
STEP 2
3-3. Using the audio system
Using the steering switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Power on, select audio
source
Volume
Radio: Select radio stations
Cassette: Fast
forward,
rewind and selecting tracks
CD: Select tracks, discs and
folder
DVD: Select tracks, discs and
chapter
Turning on the power
Press
when the audio system is turned OFF.
The audio system can be turned OFF by holding the switch down for 1 second
or more.
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source
changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a cassette tape or
CD is not inserted, that mode will be skipped.
Vehicles with CD player:
FM (1, 2)cassette playerCD playerAMSAT (1, 2, 3)
Vehicles with DVD player:
FM (1, 2)cassette playerDVD playerAMSAT (1, 2, 3)
260
3-3. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on
ume.
to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the radio mode.
Press or  on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear
a beep.
3
Fast forwarding or rewinding the cassette
STEP 2
Interior features
STEP 1
Press
to select the cassette mode.
Press and hold  or  on
until you hear a beep.
To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, press the same switch.
Selecting a track or chapter (DVD mode only for chapter selection)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the cassette mode, CD or DVD mode.
Press  or  on
to select the desired track or chapter.
Cassette mode only: you can skips maximum 9 tracks.
Selecting a disc or folder in the CD or DVD player (Folder selection is
available only when MP3/WMA disc is in use.)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
to select the CD or DVD player.
Press and hold  or  on
until you hear a beep.
261
3-3. Using the audio system
■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Push the same switch.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
262
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Hands-free system
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the
hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Telephone switch
Sending/Receiving/“Telephone” screen display (when
stopped)
End call
3
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the driver’s
side speaker.
To use the hands-free system you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (P. 269)
263
Interior features
Microphone
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Telephone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Indicators
Connection status
Conditions
Blue: Good
Yellow: Bad
: Not connected
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
264
: Full
: Low
“Rm”: Roaming area
“Hm”: Home area
: Good
: Bad
: Not connected
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
● Try to face the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances it may be difficult to hear the other party.
265
3
Interior features
• When driving on unsealed roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If the window is open
• If the air-conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If the air-conditioning is set to high
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®.
● If the mobile phone is switched off.
● If you are outside service range.
● If the mobile phone is not connected.
● If the mobile phone's battery is low.
■ Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/Signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of 
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push Profile)
Ver. 1.1.
■ Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: HYQBT0501A
IC ID: 1551A-BT0501A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
266
3-4. Using the hands-free system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only
and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be
used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of
any person at all time during use.
■ Caution while driving
Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® system.
3
NOTICE
Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the phone.
267
Interior features
■ When leaving the vehicle
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Using the Bluetooth® phone
Telephone screen
Bluetooth® Connection Status
Character Deletion
Display Last 
Person Called
Make A Call
To display the screen shown above, press
“Information” screen.
268
, then touch
on the
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
You can register up to 6 phones in the system.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
Touch
.
3
Touch
Interior features
STEP 5
.
269
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Input the passkey displayed on
screen into your phone.
STEP 6
If the message “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed,
registration is complete.
If the message “Bluetooth* connection failed. Please check the
“Passkey” and the settings of the
telephone” is displayed, start again
from the beginning.
Bluetooth® phone connection
There are two connection methods available—automatic and manual.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose one of the following methods.
Automatic connection
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
If the power switch is in the “ACC”
or “IG-ON” mode, the system will
automatically connect to the 
Bluetooth* phone. Touching automatic connection will turn it ON/
OFF.
Manual connection
If automatic connection fails or is
turned OFF, connection must be
made manually.
If the message “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed,
connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
270
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in
the “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.
Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure.
■ Dialing
STEP 1 Press
Touch
on the “Information” screen.
Inputting the phone number.
To delete the input phone number, touch ţ.
STEP 3
To delete the input phone number,
touch
.
To dial the last input phone number,
touch
.
STEP 4
Touch
or press the
on the steering wheel.
271
Interior features
STEP 2
3
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Dialing from the phone book
You can dial a number from the phone book data imported from your
mobile phone. Up to 1000 entries may be stored in the phone book.
(P. 291)
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
STEP 4
Choose the data to call from the
list.
STEP 5
Choose the number and then
touch
or press the
the steering wheel.
272
on
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Dialing from history
You can make a call from past dialed numbers or received calls.
Up to 5 numbers are stored, with the last recent number being deleted
to make room for a new number.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose the number to call from
the list.
STEP 5
Touch
or press the
the steering wheel.
on
273
3
Interior features
To choose a number from the
incoming calls history, touch
and choose a number to
call.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phone book
and call history. (P. 282)
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose the desired number to
make a call.
To change the page, touch
or
.
274
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Calling using voice recognition
Using voice recognition, you can call by name from the “Phone Book”
screen, call by number from the “Telephone” screen, and send tones
from the “Call” screen.(P. 279)
Talk switch
3
● Calling by name from the “Phone Book” screen
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Interior features
STEP 1
Press the talk switch.
Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say
the desired name.
If there are multiple entries for the same name, “Next” will be displayed.
To select the next candidate, touch
or say “Next candidate”.
Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.
Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say
“Dial”.
275
3-4. Using the hands-free system
● Calling by number from the “Telephone” screen
STEP 1
Press the talk switch.
Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say
the desired number.
STEP 3 Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.
STEP 4 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say
“Dial”.
● Sending tones from the “Call” screen
STEP 2
STEP 1
Press the talk switch.
Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say
the desired number.
STEP 3 Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.
STEP 4 Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say
“Yes”.
■ Calling using POI
You can make a call using a Point Of Interest. (“Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”)
STEP 2
276
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Made/Received call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone
book, the name is displayed in the call history.
● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the made calls history.
●
is displayed to the left of phone number for unanswered calls.
● Calls where the number is unavailable, such as public telephones, are not stored
in the call history.
■ When driving
● The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phone book”, and “Dialing from his-
tory” are unavailable.
● If you press the
■ International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in
use.
■ To display the voice recognition command list
STEP 1 After pressing the talk switch,
press
. If the “Operating
Guide” screen is displaying, press
.
STEP 2 Press
.
277
3
Interior features
on the steering wheel, the “Speed Dial” screen is displayed.
At this time phone numbers will not be displayed. Choose from the names displayed to make a call.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ To display the voice recognition operating guide
STEP 1 After pressing the talk switch,
press
. If the “Command
List” screen is displaying, press
.
STEP 2 Press
.
■ To cancel voice recognition
● Press and hold the talk switch.
● Press
on the steering wheel.
● Say “Cancel”.
● Press
. (excluding command verification)
■ When using voice recognition
Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly
recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize the desired command.
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
Touch
or press the
the steering wheel.
278
on
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ To refuse a call
Touch and hold
.
■ To adjust the received call volume
Press the
or
. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.
■ International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly, depending on the
mobile phone in use.
3
Speaking on the phone
Interior features
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■ To adjust the received call volume
Press the
or
. You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.
■ To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Touch the
.
■ Inputting a key
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phone book.
279
3-4. Using the hands-free system
STEP 1
Touch
.
Input the number.
STEP 2
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phone book,
and
are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p
or w, that come after the phone
number. 
(e.g. 056133p0123w#1✽)
STEP 3
Confirm the number displayed on screen, and touch
If you touch
.
, operation is completed without making a call.
■ To transfer a call
Touch
.
■ To hang up
Touch
or press the
on the steering wheel.
■ Transferring calls
● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the mobile phone while driving.
● If you transfer from the mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will
be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the mobile phone used.
● For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone's manual.
■ To send a tone by speed tone
Touch
then touch
list displayed.
■ While driving
Key input is unavailable.
280
. Choose the desired number from the speed tone
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Setting the hands-free system
You can speed dial, register in and edit the phone book, and set the 
Bluetooth® phone.
Settings screen
3
To display the screen shown above, press
“Information” screen, then touch
, touch
on the
on the “Telephone” screen.
281
Interior features
Connection 
Method
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Registering/Deleting a speed dial item
■ Registering a speed dial item
You can register a number from the phone book or the call history. Up
to 17 entries may be stored.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch the
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
switch on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Speed
Dial” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
STEP 6
Select the data to be registered.
282
3-4. Using the hands-free system
STEP 7
Select the number to be registered.
STEP 8
Press the desired switch.
The last dialed number will be registered in position 6.
3
Interior features
■ Deleting a speed dial item
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch the
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Speed Dial” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
Select the data to be deleted.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
switch on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
283
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ To delete all speed dial items
Follow the steps for “Deleting a speed dial item” to “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Dial”
section of the “Speed Dial Settings” screen, touch the
. A confirmation
message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch
.
Registering/Editing/Deleting a Speed Tone
■ Registering a speed tone
You can register up to 6 items.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
STEP 5
Touch
Tone” section.
in the “Speed
STEP 6
Input the desired name and touch
.
,
: Letter input
: Number/Symbol input
: Space
: Backspace
284
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Input the number and touch
STEP 7
.
Touch the desired switch.
STEP 8
3
Interior features
■ Editing a speed tone
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
Touch the switch to be edited.
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
285
3-4. Using the hands-free system
STEP 7
Input the name and touch
STEP 8
Input the number and touch
.
.
■ Deleting a speed tone
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial
Settings” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
■ To delete all speed tone data
Follow the steps “Deleting a speed tone” to “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Tone” section,
touch
. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
286
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Setting the volume
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
or
the volume.

STEP 5
Voice Volume:
speaker volume
to lower or raise
Change
the
3
■ Adaptive Volume Control
When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or over, the system automatically raises the
volume one level.
If the vehicle’s speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h), the volume will return to its original level.
You can turn this function ON/OFF by touching
.
■ To return to the default volume settings
Touch
, then
.
287
Interior features
Ring Volume: Change the ring volume
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Changing the screen settings
The following settings can be changed.
“Incoming Call Display”
The incoming call screen settings can be changed.
“Auto Answer”
When a call is received, the system automatically switches to
the talking screen after the set
period of time, meaning you
can speak without pressing anything.
“Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup”
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
288
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ “Incoming Call Display” settings
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Select the desired switch.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
: The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is
received, and you can operate the system from that
screen.
■ “Auto Answer” settings
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Auto Answer” section of the “Screen Settings” screen.
Set the wait time using
and
. (1 - 60 seconds)
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
289
Interior features
: A message is displayed at the top of the screen, and
you can only operate the system with the steering
switches.
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ “Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup” settings
STEP 1
Press
.
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
/
in the “Show Bluetooth* connection
status at startup” section of the “Screen Settings” screen.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ To set the screen settings to default
Touch
290
, then
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Phone book settings
Up to 1000 names, 2 items per name, can be registered.
■ Transferring mobile phone data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
.
STEP 6
Select the group to transfer to.
3
Interior features
STEP 5
291
3-4. Using the hands-free system
To
STEP 7
overwrite
.
data,
touch
To add to existing data, touch
.
Transfer will begin. If you wish to
cancel the transfer before fin-
STEP 8
ished, touch
.
Transfer is complete when “Transfer completed” is displayed.
If “Transfer failed” is displayed,
restart the process from the beginning.
■ Registering by input
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
292
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch the
Book” section.
in the “Phone
3-4. Using the hands-free system
STEP 6
Choose the switch to register.
: Input the name on the
“Name” screen.
,
:
Input the number(s) on
the “Telephone Number” screen. When you
touch
, the “Select
Icon” screen will appear.
Choose the desired
icon.
•
•
•
•
•
3
: Select the desired phone
number and touch
to record a
voice tag.
To play the voice tag,
touch
. To
delete the voice tag,
touch
.
STEP 7
Once input is complete, touch
.
293
Interior features
: Select the desired group
from the “Select Group”
screen. (No Group, 01 09)
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Add history data to a registered entry
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
on the “Telephone” screen.
Choose the desired number from the list.
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
To choose from the received call history, touch
desired number.
STEP 5
STEP 6
STEP 7
294
Touch
then select the
.
Choose the phone book entry to be added to.
Check the data to be added, then touch
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Editing phone book data
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book
Management” screen.
STEP 6 Choose the data to edit.
STEP 7 Choose the switch to edit.
STEP 8 After editing, press
.
■ Deleting phone book data
STEP 5
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book
Management” screen.
Select the data to delete.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
295
Interior features
STEP 1
3
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ To delete all data
Follow the steps “Deleting phone book data” to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch
. To delete all data
within a group, touch
, then select the group to delete. To delete all contact data, touch
. Check that everything is correct, then touch
.
■ Registering/Editing/Deleting from the phone book
You can register data in the phone book, edit registered data, and delete items.
STEP 1 Press
STEP 2 Touch
STEP 3 Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
STEP 4 To register data, touch
on the “Phone Book” screen.
To delete all data, touch
.
To delete or edit specific data, select the data to delete/edit, then touch
to delete, or
to edit.
■ The phone book
The method for transferring phone book data from the phone to the system varies
with phone model. See the phone’s manual.
296
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Changing the phone book group name settings
■ Registering a group name
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch the
switch in the “Group Name” section of the
“Phone Book Management” screen.
Select the group to register (“01” - “19”).
Select the switch to be edited.
STEP 6
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
: The below screen will be
displayed.
Select
the
desired icon.
: Input the name on the
“Name” screen.
STEP 8
Once editing is complete, touch
.
297
3
Interior features
STEP 7
.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Deleting a group name
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch the
switch in the “Group Name” section of the
“Phone Book Management” screen.
Select the group name to delete.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
STEP 6
STEP 7
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
■ To delete all data
Follow the steps “Deleting phone book data” procedure to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone
Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch
. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch
.
298
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Deleting the history
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
on the “Telephone” screen.
Select the data to delete from the list.
STEP 4
.
on the “Information” screen.
To delete data from the received calls history, touch
select the data to delete.
Touch
STEP 5
, then
.
3
Check that everything is correct, then touch
Interior features
STEP 6
.
■ To delete all data
Follow the steps “Deleting a group name” to “STEP 4”. Touch
going Calls” screen. To delete all received call history data, touch
touch
. Check that everything is correct, then touch
on the “Out, then
.
Changing the security settings
You can disable certain hands-free system functions. Use the security settings when you do not wish other people to see the registered data, for
example when having the vehicle valet parked at a hotel.
To enable or disable security, the security code (4 digits) is required. The
default code is “0000”. Be sure to change the security code before use.
299
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Changing the security code
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Security Code” section.
STEP 6
Input the current security code,
and touch
.
STEP 7
Input the new security code, and touch
.
A confirmation message will appear. If everything is correct,
touch
.
STEP 8
300
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Enabling security
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
Touch
in the “Phone Book Lock” section of the “Phone
Book Lock” screen.
STEP 6 Input the security code, and touch
.
■ Setting the security code to default
STEP 5
Press
.
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
STEP 6
Input the security code on the “Security Code” screen, then
STEP 7
touch
.
A confirmation message will appear. If everything is correct,
touch
.
Interior features
STEP 1
3
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
on the “Phone Book Lock” screen.
301
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ If the “Phone Book Lock” is set
If the security code is input and the “Phone Book Lock” set, the following functions
are locked.
● Display of the phone book screen and transferring, registering, editing, deleting
the phone book data.
● Display of speed dial screen, registering, deleting the speed dial and speed dial-
ing.
● Display of the other party's name for calls being received or made.
● Displayed of dialed numbers screen and received calls screen, deleting dialed
numbers and received numbers.
● Display of phone information screen.
● Changing the security code.
The speed dial screen is not displayed while driving.
■ When changing the security code
● Be sure to choose a number difficult for strangers to guess.
● Do not forget the security code. Even your Lexus dealer will be unable to dis-
able the security. If you do forget the code, initialize all personal data. (P. 188)
302
3-4. Using the hands-free system
Setting a Bluetooth® phone
■ Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the below procedure to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You may only use one
phone at a time.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
STEP 4
Touch
.
STEP 5
Select the phone to be use, then
3
Interior features
touch
.
If no phones are registered,
“Empty” will be displayed.
If “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, registration was
successful.
If another Bluetooth® phone is
already connected, a confirmation
message is displayed. Touch
or
.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
303
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ Displaying Bluetooth® information
You can check the device address and device name.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
on the “Settings” screen.
On the “Select Telephone” screen, select the desired phone and
touch
.
To change the device name, touch
STEP 5
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
in the “Device Name”
section, and input the name on the
“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).
■ To change the Bluetooth® settings
You can change the device name and passkey.
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
304
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
3-4. Using the hands-free system
To change the device name, touch
STEP 5
in the “Device Name”
section, and input the name on the
“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).
To change the passkey, touch
in the “Passkey” section,
and input 4 - 8 digits on the “Passkey” screen.
■ Setting the Bluetooth® settings to default
3
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
A confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct,
touch
.
on the “Information” screen.
Interior features
STEP 6
.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
305
3-4. Using the hands-free system
■ To delete the Bluetooth® settings
STEP 1
Press
STEP 2
Touch
STEP 3
Touch
STEP 4
Touch
STEP 5
Touch
in the “Bluetooth* Telephone” section of the 
“Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
On the “Delete Telephone” screen, select the phone to delete.
STEP 6
.
on the “Information” screen.
on the “Telephone” screen.
on the “Settings” screen.
To check the device address, touch
STEP 7
.
If you touch
, a confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct, touch
.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
306
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Illuminated entry system: The various lights automatically turn on/off
according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, whether the doors are open/closed, and the power
switch mode.
3
Interior features
Outer foot light
Steering spot light
Front personal lights (P. 309)
Shift lever light
307
3-5. Using the interior lights
Inside door handle lights
Rear personal lights (P. 309)
Rear interior lights
Door courtesy lights
Foot light
Front scuff light
When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum, the foot
lights, inside door handle lights and shift lever light will turn off. (P. 111)
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
If the interior lights, personal lights and steering spot light remain ON when the
door is not fully closed or the interior light switch in “DOOR” position, the lights will
go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (P. 500)
308
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights
“ON”
“OFF”
“DOOR”
The interior lights are turned on/off
by the illuminated entry system.
Personal lights
3
Front
Interior features
ON/OFF
309
3-5. Using the interior lights
Rear
ON/OFF
■ Customization
Settings can be changed. (P. 504)
310
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
3
Interior features
Storage compartment
Glove box
Overhead console
Door pocket
Cup holders
Coin holder
Console box
311
3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the headlight switch is on.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( P. 31)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console box
Pull up the lever to release the
lock.
Slide armrest.
Lift the armrest to open.
312
3-6. Using the storage features
■ Console box light
The console box light turn on when the headlight switch is on.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Overhead console
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may
warp or become cracked.
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open. Items may fall out and cause injury.
313
Interior features
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
3
3-6. Using the storage features
Storage compartment
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the storage compartment open.
The opened compartment many hit your body or items may be thrown out of the
compartment in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.
Coin holder
Pull up lever to release the lock.
Slide armrest.
314
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front
To open, press down and release
the cup holder lid.
Rear
3
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
315
Interior features
To open, press in and release the
rear cup holder on the armrest.
3-6. Using the storage features
Door pockets
The door pocket can be opened
and closed.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
316
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position: Flip down.
Side position: Flip down,
unhook, and swing to the
side.
Side extender: Place in side
position, then slide backwards.
3
Interior features
317
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
318
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
■ Adjust clock
With navigation system:  “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system: Perform the following steps.
STEP 1
.
.
STEP 3
Interior features
STEP 2
Press
Touch
3
Adjust hours.
Adjust minutes.
Round the nearest hour.
Turn daylight saving time on.
Turn daylight saving time off.
After setting, touch
.
■ The clock is displayed when
The power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.
■ When the 12 volt battery is disconnected
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
319
3-7. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
The displayed temperature ranges from -40°F (-40°C) up to 122°F
(50°C).
■ Operating conditions
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ When --- is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
320
3-7. Other interior features
Ashtrays
Front
Slide the lid back to open.
Push the lever to remove the
ashtray.
Push the lid to close.
Rear
Pull the ashtray lid to open.
3
Interior features
Hold the plate down and pull the
ashtray upwards to remove.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
321
3-7. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
Slide the lid back to open,
and push the cigarette lighter
down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.
CAUTION
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
322
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than
10A.
3
■ The power outlet can be used when
Interior features
The power switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when not in use. 
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V/10A.
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
323
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters (if equipped)
Heats the seats
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
■ The seat heaters can be used when
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
324
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the hybrid system is off.
3
Interior features
325
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.
Heats the seats
The indicator light (red) comes
on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
326
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the hybrid system is off.
3
Interior features
327
3-7. Other interior features
Armrest
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
328
3-7. Other interior features
Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by pressing the switch shown
below.
Raise/lower
3
The power switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
■ Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when the shift
lever is shifted to “R”.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
● Shift the shift lever into “P”.
● The switch is pressed again.
● The shift lever is shifted out of “R”, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15
km/h).
If the hybrid system is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to
the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is
turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the
sunshade again, press the switch.
■ After the power switch is turned “OFF”
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered for approximately 1 minute.
329
Interior features
■ The rear sunshade can be used when
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the hybrid system is off.
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.
330
3-7. Other interior features
Floor mats
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
Secure the floor mat using the
hooks provided.
3
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet. If the floor mat
slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
331
Interior features
■ When inserting the floor mat
3-7. Other interior features
Trunk features
■ Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■ Shopping bag hooks
■ First-aid kit storage belt
Loosen
Tighten
332
3-7. Other interior features
■ Luggage mat
Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
NOTICE
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
333
3-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■ Programming the HomeLink
STEP 1
Point the remote control for the
device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink control buttons.
Keep the indicator light on the
HomeLink in view while programming.
334
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold down one of the
buttons on the HomeLink and
the button on the transmitter.
When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow
to a rapid flash after 20 seconds,
you can release both buttons.
STEP 3
Test the operation of the
HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button.
STEP 4
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
335
3
Interior features
If programming a garage door
opener, check to see if the garage
door opens and closes. If the
garage door does not operate, see
if your garage transmitter is of the
Rolling Code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator
light (on the HomeLink) flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is the
Rolling Code type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling
code system”.
3-7. Other interior features
■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the training button.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Press the training button.
Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button
twice. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
336
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.
3-7. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Basic programming” instructions.
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light on the HomeLink transceiver should turn on.
The HomeLink continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as
the button is pressed.
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold down the 2 outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
337
Interior features
Operating the HomeLink
3
3-7. Other interior features
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to
prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
338
3-7. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
push “AUTO” for longer than 3
seconds.
3
■ Displays and directions
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
Interior features
Display
339
3-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press “AUTO” until a number (1 to
STEP 2
15) appears on the compass display.
STEP 3
340
Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
3-7. Other interior features
STEP 4
Wait a few seconds until the compass direction is displayed.
The calibration is complete.
■ Circling calibration
If “CAL” appears on the display,
drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direction
is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
3
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The 12 volt battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
341
Interior features
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the display.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. 
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
342
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care ......... 344
Cleaning and protecting the 
vehicle exterior........................ 344
Cleaning and protecting the 
vehicle interior......................... 346
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself 
maintenance......................... 355
Do-it-yourself service 
precautions............................... 355
Hood .............................................. 358
Positioning the jack .................. 359
4-2. Maintenance........................... 349
Engine compartment ................ 361
Maintenance 
requirements............................ 349
Tires................................................. 375
General maintenance .............. 351
Wheels .......................................... 389
Emission inspection and 
maintenance (I/M) 
programs ................................... 354
Air conditioning filter ............... 391
Tire inflation pressure .............. 385
Electronic key battery............. 393
Checking and replacing 
fuses............................................. 395
Headlight aim ................................ 411
Light bulbs..................................... 413
343
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● If water no longer beads on clean paint, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure automatic car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door is
closed.
■ Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes
or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same
mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
344
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
■ Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. 
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
345
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
346
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the
rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the
heater wires.
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
4
CAUTION
● Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.
● Do not splash water on the electric components in the engine compartment. This
may cause the malfunction of the electric components.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. 
(P. 70)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
347
Maintenance and care
■ Water in the vehicle
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.
● Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
348
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. 
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
349
Maintenance and care
The use of Lexus service and repair manuals is recommended.
4
4-2. Maintenance
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■ Warning in handling of battery, oils, fuels, and fluids
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 371)
● Used engine oil contains chemicals that have been shown to cause cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact. Always protect your
skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
350
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
• At the correct level?
(P. 370)
Engine/inverter coolant
• At the correct level?
(P. 368)
Engine oil
• At the correct level?
(P. 363)
Exhaust system
• No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
• Not blocked with foreign matter? 
(P. 369)
Washer fluid
• At the correct level?
4
Maintenance and care
Brake fluid
(P. 374)
Luggage compartment
Items
12 volt battery
Check points
• Maintenance-free (P. 371)
351
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
352
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Transmission “Park” 
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be hold securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
“P”?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Pulls to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Head restraints
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 411)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
4
CAUTION
■ If the hybrid system is running
Turn off the hybrid system and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
353
Maintenance and care
Doors/trunk
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the 12 volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
Parts and tools
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level
(P. 370)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine/inverter coolant level
(P. 368)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrate and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
355
4
Maintenance and care
12 volt battery condition (P. 371)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 363)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 395)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Headlight aim
(P. 411)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Radiator and condenser
(P. 369)
Tire inflation pressure
(P. 385)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid
(P. 374)
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel

CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury.
■ When working on the engine compartment:
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, inverter, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the power switch is “OFF”.
With the power switch in “IG-ON” mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. 
(P. 369)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
4
Maintenance and care
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. 
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning the jack
When raising your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
■ Rear
4
Maintenance and care
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the jack.
Always use automotive jack stands or a solid, level, surface.
● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in “P”.
● Make sure to set the jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the vehicle
and may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
jack.
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
4
Washer fluid tank
(P. 374)
Gasoline engine/inverter
coolant reservoir (P. 368)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 369)
Radiator
(P. 369)
Maintenance and care
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 363)
Engine oil filler cap

(P. 364)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 370)
Fuse box
(P. 395)
■ 12 volt battery
P. 371
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the cover
Front
Right-hand side
Left-hand side
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Installing the clips
Open
Insert
Press
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
363
4
Maintenance and care
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the hybrid system, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Oil grade
Oil quantity
(Low  Full)
Items
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
364
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise until you hear a click.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Recommended viscosity
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
*: If SAE 5W-30 is not available,
SAE 10W-30 may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
■ How to read oil container labels
Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that
help you to select the proper oil.
4
Maintenance and care
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre-
quent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km). If the vehicle consumes more than this amount, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Resetting the engine oil maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
Perform the following steps:
STEP 1 Press the “DISP” switch (P. 118) to change the multi-information display
to blank.
STEP 2 Turn the power switch to “OFF” mode.
STEP 3 Turn the power switch to “IG-ON” mode with the trip meter reset button
held down.
STEP 4 Keep pressing the button for longer than 7 seconds after the power
switch is in “IG-ON” mode.
After the above operation, the message
shown in the left will appear on the display.
The master warning light and tone will turn
on. After 5 seconds, the system reset is completed.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
4
■ When replacing the engine oil
Maintenance and care
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
Reservoir cap
Full
Low
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water
pump. 
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine/inverter coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When the coolant may be hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■ When adding the coolant
Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damage to parts or paint.
4
Radiator and condenser
CAUTION
■ The radiator and condenser may be hot after driving
To prevent burns, do not touch the radiator or condenser after driving.
369
Maintenance and care
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. 
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■ Adding fluid
Fluid type
Items
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
12 volt battery
■ Location
The 12 volt battery is located in the
left-hand side of luggage compartment.
4
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
371
Maintenance and care
■ Exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the 12 volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12 volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12 volt battery
In some cases, the hybrid system may not start. Follow one or both of the following
procedures:
● After opening and closing the driver's door, wait 10 seconds then attempt to
start the hybrid system. (If the system does not start first time, repeat the procedure.)
● With the shift lever in “P” and the power switch in the “OFF” mode, open and
close any door, then attempt to start the hybrid system.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact
your Lexus dealer.
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the 12 volt battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safety charge the 12 volt battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
4
■ How to recharge the 12 volt battery
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, seek
medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw
egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
373
Maintenance and care
Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12 volt battery
Never recharge the battery while the hybrid system is on. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. 
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
tread wear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Tread wear indicator
Worn tread
The location of tread wear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
inflation pressure if not rotated.
■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
tire rotation.
■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 433, 438)
375
Maintenance and care
Front
Lexus recommends tire rotation
in accordance with the maintenance schedule to equalize tire
wear and extend tire life.
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters can be installed in any of the following three ways:
● Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters can be removed from the
old wheels and installed on the new wheels.
● When replacing only the tire, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter already installed on the wheel does not need to be replaced.
● Replacing both a wheel and its tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning ECU and tire pressure warning system
must be initialized. (P. 377, 378)
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire
inflation pressures.
● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
● When changing the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the power switch to “OFF”
mode.
4
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
STEP 3
Turn the power switch to “IG-ON” mode.
377
Maintenance and care
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 487)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly three times and the message
“PRESSURE
INITIAL”
appears on the multi-information
display.
STEP 5
Wait for a few minutes with the “IG-ON” mode, and then turn
power switch to “OFF” mode.
Registering and selecting ID codes
■ Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires (winter tires etc.) is registered at
“2nd”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the
tire pressure warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2nd” position: The code is not registered. When you replace a new set
of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from
your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus
dealer.
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the incorrect ID code is selected, the tire pressure
warning system will not operate properly. After a certain period of
time, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute to indicate a system malfunction.
“MAIN”
“2nd”
4
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■ Low profile tires (245/40R18, P245/40R18 and 245/40ZR18 tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to
use snow tires or snow chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a
speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
379
Maintenance and care
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 385, 492).
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 174)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the system again.
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the warning light does
not flash and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display.
● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been com-
pleted, the warning light flashes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
4
Maintenance and care
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or tread wear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if
the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
4
NOTICE
mitters
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● When replacing tires, make sure also to replace the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter grommets.
■ Do not use puncture sealant sprays to repair flats
Puncture sealant sprays may damage tire pressure tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters.
383
Maintenance and care
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires (245/40R18, P245/40R18 and 245/40ZR18 tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when
receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may
be damaged more severely.
● Avoid hot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 487)
4
Maintenance and care
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust tire pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
If equipped, do not forget to check the spare.
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
4
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
387
Maintenance and care
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. 
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling
control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and offset.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
Lexus does not recommend using:
• Wheels of different sizes or types
• Used wheels
• Bent wheels that have been straightened
• Lexus wheels with after market chrome plating
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be switched over from the old
wheels. (P. 376)
389
Maintenance and care
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
STEP 1
Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in
the outside air mode.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the power switch to “OFF” mode.
Open the glove box and
remove the partition.
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 5
Push the tabs and remove the
filter case.
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
■ Changing interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
4
Remove the cover.
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. 
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the electronic key.
● Do not bend the battery terminals.
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the power switch to “OFF” mode.
STEP 2 Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.
P. 362
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Remove the clips.
STEP 1
4
395
Maintenance and care
Front controller in the engine compartment fuse box
Lift the lid off while pushing the
tabs on either side.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Passenger's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Luggage compartment
Remove the cover.
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Luggage compartment (vehicles with active stabilizer suspension
system)
Remove the lid.
STEP 4
STEP 5
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 400) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
4
Maintenance and care
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
STEP 6
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment
400
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
FR CTRL-B
25
H-LP HI, HORN
2
RELIEF VLV
10
Fuel system
3
ETCS
10
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
4
H-LP CLN
30
Headlight cleaner
5
STB-AM
30
Active stabilizer suspension system
6
DEICER
25
7
FR CTRL-AM
30
FR TAIL, FR FOG, WASH
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
8
IG2
10
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, noise filter
9
EFI No.2
10
Fuel system, exhaust system
10
H-LP R LWR
15
Headlight low beam (right)
11
H-LP L LWR
15
Headlight low beam (left)
12
D/C CUT
30
DOME, MPX-B
13
IGCT No.3
7.5
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
14
IGCT No.2
7.5
Hybrid system
MPX-B
7.5
16
DOME
7.5
Interior lights, foot lights, vanity light,
gauges and meters
17
ABS MAIN1
10
Electronically controlled brake system
18
ABS MOTOR
30
ABS
19
ABS MAIN2
10
Electronically controlled brake system
20
F/PMP
25
Fuel system
21
EFI
25
EFI2, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
22
INJ
20
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
4
Maintenance and care
15
Power windows, door control system,
power seat, electronically controlled
brake system, combination switch,
electric tilt and telescopic steering,
gauges and meters
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
23
A/F
15
Fuel system
24
INV W/P
10
Hybrid system
25
IGCT No.1
20
Hybrid system, IGCT No.2, 
IGCT No.3
26
FR FOG
15
Fog light
27
FR TAIL
10
Tail light, rear side marker light
28
WASH
20
Windshield washer
29
HORN
10
Horn
30
H-LP HI
20
Headlight high beam
31
DC/DC
140
Charging system
32
RAD FAN
60
Electric cooling fans
33
LH J/B AM
80
S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV, A/C,
FUEL OPN, FR WIP, H-LP LVL, 
FR S/HTR LH, A/C W/P
34
E/G AM
60
H-LP CLN, FR CTRL-AM, DEICER,
STB AM
35
HEATER
50
Air conditioning system
36
DEFOG
50
Rear window defogger
37
ABS2
30
VSC, ABS
80
AM1, OBD, STOP SW, TI & TE, 
FR P/SEAT RH, STR LOCK, 
SECURITY, ECU-IG R, RH-IG, 
F S/HTR RH, CIG, PWR OUTLET, 
AIR SUS
38
402
RH J/B-AM
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
RR J/B
80
STOP LP R, STOP LP L, RR TAIL,
PSB, RR FOG, RR-IG1
40
OIL PUMP
60
Transmission
41
EPS
80
EPS
42
P/I-B1
60
EFI, F/PMP, INJ
43
E/G-B
30
EM-VLV, FR CTRL-B, ETCS
44
MAIN
30
H-LP R LWR, H-LP L LWR
45
VGRS
40
VGRS
46
ABS1
50
ABS MOTOR, ABS MAIN1, 
ABS MAIN2
47
P/I-B2
60
A/F, BATT FAN, IGCT, INV W/P
48
BATT FAN
20
Electric cooling fans
49
RAD No.1
30
Audio system
50
RAD No.2
30
Audio system
51
IG2 MAIN
20
IG2, GAUGE, IGN
52
TURN-HAZ
15
Front turn signal lights, rear turn 
signal lights
53
ABS MAIN3
10
Electronically controlled brake system
54
ECU-B
10
VGRS, EPS
4
Maintenance and care
39
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Circuit
1
FR WIP
30
Windshield wipers
2
RR-IG
7.5
RR-IG1
3
LH-IG
10
Emergency flashers, seat belt pretensioners, headlight cleaners, exhaust
system, rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, front left door control system, rear left door control
system
4
H-LP LVL
7.5
Adaptive front lighting system
5
A/C W/P
7.5
Air conditioning system
6
RAD No.3
10
Audio system
7
FR DOOR LH
20
Front left door control system
8
RR DOOR LH
20
Rear left door control system
9
FR S/HTR LH
15
Seat heaters, seat heaters and ventilators
10
VGRS, EPS, electronically controlled brake system, yaw rate & G
sensor, dynamic radar cruise control
system, rear view monitor system,
moon roof
10
404
Ampere
ECU-IG LH
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
Steering switches, distance control
switch, audio system, glove box light,
switch illumination, cigarette lighter,
shift lever light, touch screen, rear
personal lights
11
PANEL
7.5
12
S/ROOF
25
13
FUEL OPEN
10
Fuel lid opener, trunk opener
14
LH-B
10
Anti-theft system
15
TRK OPN
10
Trunk opener
16
TV
7.5
Touch screen, rear view monitor system
17
A/C
7.5
Air conditioning system
18
FR P/SEAT LH
30
Power seat
4
Maintenance and care
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse
406
Ampere
Circuit
1
ECU-IG RH
10
Electric tilt and telescopic steering,
combination switch, power seat,
smart access system with push-button start, air conditioning system,
touch screen, shift lock system, tire
pressure warning system, front/rear
stabilizer system
2
FR S/HTR RH
15
Seat heaters, seat heaters and ventilators
3
RH-IG
7.5
Front right door control system, rear
right door control system, seat belt
pretensioners, transmission, seat
heaters, seat heaters and ventilators
4
AM2
15
Starting system
5
FR DOOR RH
20
Front right door control system
6
RR DOOR RH
20
Rear right door control system
7
AIR SUS
20
AVS
8
PWR OUTLET
15
Power outlet
9
CIG
15
Cigarette lighter
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
10
ACC
Ampere
Circuit
7.5
Audio system, smart access system
with push-button start, touch screen,
rear view monitor system
IGN
10
12
GAUGE
7.5
Gauges and meters
13
STR LOCK
25
Steering lock system
14
SECURITY
7.5
Smart access system with push-button start
15
TI & TE
20
Electric tilt and telescopic steering
16
AM1
7.5
17
STOP SW
7.5
Stoplights, shift lock system
18
OBD
7.5
On-board diagnosis system
19
FR P/SEAT RH
30
Power seat
4
Maintenance and care
11
Smart access system with push-button start, SRS airbag system, stoplights, hybrid system, steering lock
system, electronically controlled
brake system
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Luggage compartment
Fuse
408
Ampere
Circuit
1
RR TAIL
10
Tail lights, license plate lights
2
STOP LP R
10
High mounted stoplights, stoplights
3
STOP LP L
10
Stoplights, back-up light
4
RR FOG
7.5
5
RR-B
10
Trunk light
6
RR-IG1
10
Pre-collision seat belt, seat belt pretensioners
7
RR-IG2
10
8
PSB
30
Pre-collision seat belt
9
RR S/SHADE
7.5
Rear sunshade
10
RH J/B-B
30
FR DOOR RH, RR DOOR RH,
AM2
11
LH J/B-B
30
FR DOOR LH, RR DOOR LH, 
RAD No.3
12
R/B-B
15
D/C cut
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Luggage compartment 
(vehicles with active stabilizer suspension system)
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
STB FR
50
Front stabilizer
2
STB RR
30
Rear stabilizer
3
STB DC/DC
30
DC/DC converter
4
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 413)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
409
Maintenance and care
■ After a fuse is replaced
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
● Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim
■ Adjustment bolts
For high beam
For low beam
■ Gauges
Vertical movement gauges
Horizontal
movement
gauges
4
Maintenance and care
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
While watching the gauges, use
a Phillips-head screwdriver to
turn each adjustment the bolt so
that for vertical adjustment the
bubble is in the center of the
gauge, and for horizontal
adjustment the gauge reads “0”.
If you feel that there is a large
deviation, take the vehicle to
your Lexus dealer to adjust the
headlight aim.
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 488)
■ Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.
P. 362
■ Front bulb locations
4
Maintenance and care
Parking light
Headlight high beam
■ Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight high beam
STEP 1
Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to remove it.
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Parking light
STEP 1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 2
Remove the light bulb.
4
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid. Remove the
trunk handle and panel cover clips.
STEP 2
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn bulb bases counterclockwise.
415
Maintenance and care
■ Back-up light
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
■ Rear turn signal light
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
416
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
● Headlight low beams (high-intensity discharge bulbs)
● Fog lights
● Front turn signal lights
● Front side marker lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
● Rear side marker lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
4
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ LED light bulbs
The tail, tail/stop and high mounted stoplights consist of a number of LEDs. If any
LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
If two or more LEDs in a stoplight burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local
laws (SAE).
■ High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights
If voltage to the high-intensity discharge bulbs is insufficient, the light may not come
on, or may go out temporarily. The high-intensity discharge bulbs will come on
when normal power is restored.
417
Maintenance and care
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights. 
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits
or component parts.
Doing so may result in serious injury due to electric shock.
■ High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing high-intensity discharge headlights
(including light bulbs).
● Do not touch the high voltage socket while the headlights are turned on.
20000V is momentarily generated and may cause severe injury by electric
shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
418
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information ........... 420
If your vehicle needs to be 
towed........................................... 420
If you think something is 
wrong .......................................... 427
Event data recorder ................. 428
5
5-2. Steps to take in an 
emergency............................ 430
If a warning light turns on or a 
warning buzzer sounds... ......... 430
If a warning message is 
displayed.................................... 436
If you have a flat tire 
(Vehicles with run-flat 
tires)............................................. 455
If you have a flat tire 
(Vehicles with standard 
tires)............................................. 456
If the hybrid system will not 
start.............................................. 466
If the shift lever cannot be 
shifted from P........................... 467
If you lose your keys................. 468
When the electronic key 
battery is discharged............ 469
If the 12 volt battery is 
discharged .................................. 471
If your vehicle overheats ........ 475
If the vehicle becomes 
stuck ............................................ 478
419
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The hybrid system is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
420
5-1. Essential information
Towing eyelet
■ Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Put the shift lever in “N”.
STEP 3 The power switch must be in the “ACC” mode (hybrid system off) or the
“IG-ON” mode (hybrid system on).
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
5
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
● If the hybrid system is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
421
When trouble arises
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelet and the cable or chain.
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelet
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 456
422
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead
to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
5
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
When trouble arises
423
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
When not using a towing dolly, turn
the power switch to “ACC” mode
and shift the shift lever to “N”.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
424
5-1. Essential information
From rear
Switch to “ACC” mode so that the
steering wheel is unlocked.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
● Do not tow the vehicle with the power switch “OFF”. 
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle
could be damaged while being towed.
5
When trouble arises
425
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
426
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
427
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record
data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
In a crash or a near car crash event
The EDR may record some or all of the following information.
● Gasoline engine speed
● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
● Vehicle speed
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● Position of the transmission shift lever
● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
● Driver's seat position
● SRS airbag deployment data
● SRS airbag system diagnostic data
Your Lexus’ Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another EDR.
There are a variety of driving situations which include activating the vehicle stability control (VSC) under which the VSC EDR will record certain
information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of the following information:
● Behavior of the vehicle
● Steering wheel angle
● Vehicle speed
428
5-1. Essential information
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● To what extent the brake pedal was applied
● To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4 wheels
● Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR
does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
● Officially requested by the police or other authorities
● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
● Ordered by a court
5
However, if necessary Lexus will:
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
429
When trouble arises
● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
(U.S.A.) • Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
(Canada)
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released, the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 444
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
while the hybrid system is running.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Malfunction in:
(U.S.A.)
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada)
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The transmission control system.
5
When trouble arises
SRS warning light
Malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
431
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
ABS warning light
Malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
(Canada)
• The brake assist system.
(U.S.A.)
ECB*1 /VSC warning light
Malfunction in:
• The electronically controlled brake system; or
• The VSC.
Electric power steering system warning light
Malfunction in the EPS.
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Malfunction in the pre-collision system.
*1: Electronically Controlled Brake System
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
432
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*2
A door or a trunk is not fully
closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
(Approximately 2.6 gal. [10
L, 2.2 Imp.gal.] or less)
Refuel the vehicle.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*3
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Correction procedure
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*3
Fasten the seat belt.
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
Adjust the tire inflation pressure.
When the light stays on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.
Have the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
Take appropriate action in
accordance with the message
displayed on the multi-information display.
*2: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 443
*3:Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminder buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds
intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at lest 12
mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in
a different tone for 20 more seconds.
433
5
When trouble arises
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is your vehicle low on gas?
If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in
the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the following:
● The airbag sensor assembly
● Front airbag sensors
● The curtain shield airbag sensors
● The side and curtain shield airbag sensors
● The occupant detection sensor
● The seat belt buckle switches
● The driver's seat position sensor
● The inflators
● The warning light
● The interconnecting wiring and power sources
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light.
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Vehicles with run-flat tires:
• Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive
over 55 mph (90 km/h).
• Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by
the nearest Lexus dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
● Vehicles with standard tires:
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
435
When trouble arises
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation
pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is
flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest
Lexus dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Multi-information display
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the following
actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message
Details
Malfunction in the hybrid system.
(Flashing)
Abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message
Details
Malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system.
Malfunction in the rear lights system.
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.
The tire pressure warning light will blink for 1 minute
and then stay on.
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Malfunction in the steering lock system.
(Flashing)
Malfunction in the active stabilizer suspension system.
(If equipped)

Malfunction in the PCS.
(If equipped)
5
(If equipped)
439
When trouble arises
Intuitive parking assist malfunction.
The malfunctioning sensor is shown flashing on the
display. (The illustration shows malfunctioning left
front sensor.)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
440
Details
Malfunction in the radar cruise control system.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Switch the power
switch to “OFF” and then to “IG-ON” mode again to
reset the cruise control system.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system may become inoperative in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered.
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
● If tire chains are used.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
when the power switch is turned to “IG-ON” mode, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer.
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
441
When trouble arises
NOTICE
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warning may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message
Details
Malfunction in the TRAC, VSC or hill-start assist control system.
In some cases, only “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK
ECB*” is displayed.
(U.S.A)
Malfunction in the ABS or BA.
In some cases, only “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK
ECB*” is displayed.
(Canada)
Malfunction in the VGRS
(Steering guide symbol
and arrows are flashing)
The steering sensor cable is broken and signals cannot be received.
*: Electronically Controlled Brake System
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message turns off.
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
One or more of the doors
is not fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of
the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
5
The hood is not fully
closed.
When trouble arises
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood.
cate that hood is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
The trunk is not fully
closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk.
cate that trunk is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
(Flashing)
(Flashing)
444
The moon roof is not fully
closed (with the power
Close the moon roof.
switch “OFF” and the
driver’s door opened).
The parking brake is still
engaged (with the vehicle
Release the parking
having reached a speed
brake.
of more than 3 mph [5
km/h]).
The washer fluid level is
low.
Add washer fluid.
The hybrid system has
overheated.
Stop and check. 
(P. 475)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
The engine oil level is low.
Check the engine oil level,
and add if necessary.
The engine oil is scheduled to be changed.
(U.S.A. only)
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
Check the engine oil, and
after the engine oil is
changed. (The indicator change if necessary.
will not work properly
unless the oil maintenance data has been
reset).
The engine oil should be
changed.
When trouble arises
(U.S.A. only)
5
Comes on approximately
5000 miles (8000 km) Check and change the
engine oil.
after the engine oil is
changed (and the oil
maintenance data has
been reset).
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message

(Flashing)
Details
Low tire inflation pressure.
Check the tire inflation
pressure, and adjust to the
appropriate level.
The PCS is not currently
functional.
Clean the grille and the
sensor.
This message appears
when the pre-collision
system is hot. In this case,
wait until the system
cools down.
Intuitive parking assist is
dirty or covered with ice.
(The illustration shows
something on the left
front sensor.)
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
446
Correction procedure
The radar cruise control
sensor is dirty or covered Clean the sensor.
with ice.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
The radar cruise control
system is unable to judge
vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
• Switch the mode select
to either the normal or
power mode.
• If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to either the
intermittent or the slow
mode.
Your vehicle is nearing
the vehicle ahead (in
radar cruise mode).
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
The vehicle is unable to
drive over 60 mph (or
Wait until the transmission
120 km/h) until the trans- warms up.
mission warms up.
5
Stop the vehicle and shift
the shift lever to “P”.
(Flashing)
(Flashing)
The gasoline engine canStop the vehicle and shift
not operate or the shift
the shift lever to “P”.
lever is in “N” for a long
time.
447
When trouble arises
The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
The transmission is out of Shift the shift lever to “P”
“P” when attempting to
before pressing the power
start the hybrid system.
switch.
■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (P. 366)
■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance closes.
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement and alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
449
5
When trouble arises
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Messages displayed when refueling
The following messages are displayed after the fuel lid opener is pressed.
If the messages do not change or are displayed continuously, have the
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
Message
Details
Preparing the vehicle for refueling.
Wait a moment.
You may commence refueling.
Finish refueling within 30 minutes.
Close the fuel lid.
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Other messages
If the following message is displayed, take appropriate action and confirm
that the message has disappeared.
Message
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Details
The driver’s door is opened when the transmission is
out of “P” with the hybrid system on.
Shift the shift lever to “P”.
Calibrate the neutral position of the steering wheel.
(P. 151)
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning massage and light turn off.
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer

Warning message
(Comes on for 8 seconds.)
(Flashing)
Once
3 times
(Flashing)
452
Details
Correction
procedure
The electronic key
is not detected
when attempting
to start the hybrid
system.
Confirm the
location of
the electronic key.
An open door
other than the
driver's door is
closed while the
electronic key is
outside the detection range and the
power switch is in
“ACC” or “IGON” mode.
Confirm the
location of
the electronic key.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
3 times
(Flashing)
Continuous
Continuous
(Flashing)
Once

(Flashing)
Correction
procedure
An open door
other than the
driver's door is
closed while the
electronic key is
outside the detection range and the
power switch is in
“ACC” or “IGON” mode with
the shift lever in
“P”.
Turn the
power
switch
“OFF” or
confirm the
location of
the electronic key.
An open door
other than the
• Shift the
driver's door is
shift lever
closed while the
to “P”.
electronic key is
outside the detec- • Confirm
tion range and the the location of the
power switch is in
electronic
“ACC” or “IGkey.
ON” mode with
the shift lever not
in “P”.
Replace the
The electronic key
battery.
battery is low.
(P. 393)
453
5
When trouble arises
(Displayed alternately)
Details
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer


Exterior
buzzer
Details
Correction
procedure

An open door has
been closed and
the power switch
has been turned
twice to the
“ACC” mode from
“OFF” mode.
Press the
power
switch while
applying the
brakes.

The steering lock
has not released
within 3 seconds
of pressing the
power switch. The
power switch indicator will flash
green for 15 seconds.
Press the
power
switch again
while turning the
steering
wheel with
the brake
pedal
depressed.
Warning message
(Flashing)
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with run-flat tires)
Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall)
You can continue driving a vehicle with run-flat tires even if any
tire goes flat.
It is able to run for a maximum of
100 miles (160 km) at a speed
below 55 mph (90 km/h) after
the tire pressure warning light
comes on. (P. 433)
■ In some condition (such as at high temperatures)
You can not continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).
■ If you cannot distinguish between the standard tires and run-flat tires
Consult your Lexus dealer.
■ For the detailed information on run-flat tires
5
See the tire warranty book.
■ When replacing the tires
● Have the tires replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or
removal of tires.
● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as
well.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
455
When trouble arises
NOTICE
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to “P”.
● Stop the hybrid system.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack handle
Tools
Towing eyelet
Jack
Tighten
Wheel nut wrench
456
Spare tire
Loosen
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Compact spare tire
The compact tire saves space in your luggage compartment, and its
lighter weight helps to enhance fuel economy and permits easier
installation in case of a flat tire.
The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary emergency use only.
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. 
5
(P. 487)
The compact spare tire can be used many times, if necessary. It has tread life of up
to 3000 miles (4800 km) depending on road conditions and your driving habits.
When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace the tire. (P. 375)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains
on.
457
When trouble arises
■ Tread life
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
STEP 3
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
STEP 1
Flat tire
Front
Rear
STEP 2
Wheel chock positions
Left-hand side
Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Left-hand side
In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
In front of the front left-hand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
STEP 1
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
STEP 2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel 
sheet
STEP 3
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into loose
contact with the disc wheel sheet.
Lower the vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
STEP 4
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps
and fit tire chains to the rear tires.
STEP 1 Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
STEP 2 Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehi-
cle.
STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 377)
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. 
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
● Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Replacing a flat tire
5
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.
The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
463
When trouble arises
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When using the spare tire
● Remember that your spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle.
Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use two spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident.
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as
well.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
5
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
When trouble arises
465
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system will not start
If the hybrid system will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P. 101), consider each of the following points.
■ The hybrid system will not start even if you are carrying the correct electronic key
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The electronic key battery may be discharged. (P. 18)
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Add fuel to the vehicle.
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
● There may be a malfunction in the hybrid vehicle immobilizer system. 
(P. 62)
■ The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low volume
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The 12 volt battery may be discharged. (P. 471)
● The 12 volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does
not sound
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the 12 volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The 12 volt battery may be discharged. (P. 471)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
466
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the power switch to the “ACC” mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
467
When trouble arises
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made and programmed to your vehicle by
your Lexus dealer, using one of the other keys or the key number stamped
on your key number plate.
468
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When the electronic key battery is discharged
If the electronic key battery is discharged, the doors and trunk can be
opened by the mechanical key. The hybrid system can be still started by following the procedure.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions
Doors
Using the mechanical key in order
to perform the following operations:
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
469
When trouble arises
Trunk
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the hybrid system
STEP 1
STEP 2
Put the shift lever in “P” and apply the brakes.
Hold the electronic key close to
the power switch (within 0.4 in. [10
mm]). Make sure that the button
side of the key is facing away from
the power switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
key with the depleted battery if any
of the doors will be opened and
closed while this operation.
Press the power switch within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds,
keeping the brake pedal depressed.
If the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 3
■ Replacing the key battery
As this procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic
key battery be replaced immediately. (P. 393)
470
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the 12 volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the 12
volt battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Lexus Customer
Service.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12 volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
Open the trunk using the mechanical key. (P. 469)
STEP 2
Connecting the jumper cables.
If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a
cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce
the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Negative (-) battery terminal or your vehicle.
STEP 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the 12 volt battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the power switch “OFF”.
5
When trouble arises
471
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the
power switch to the “IG-ON” mode, then start the vehicle’s
hybrid system.
STEP 6 Make sure the “READY” light comes on. If the light does not
come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 7 Once the vehicle’s hybrid system has started, remove the
jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were
connected.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP 5
■ To prevent 12 volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■ When the 12 volt battery is removed or discharged
The hybrid system may not start. (P. 372)
Also, the following systems must be initialized.
● Power windows (P. 53)
● Moon roof (P. 56)
● Variable gear ratio steering (P. 151)
● Tire pressure warning system (P. 377)
● Intuitive parking assist (P. 151)
472
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● If the battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
473
5
When trouble arises
affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
Hybrid vehicles cannot be push-started.
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
474
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
■ Electric motor (traction motor) and inverter
If the message “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is displayed on the
multi-information display.
■ Gasoline engine
If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the
red zone, the gasoline engine has probably overheated.
Observe the following steps:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
475
5
When trouble arises
STEP 5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air
conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam: 
Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the hybrid system running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 362)
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating: 
Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to
fall and then stop the hybrid system.
If the fan is not operating: 
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your local
Lexus dealer.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently, check
the coolant level and inspect the
radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 6
Add coolant if required.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if coolant is
unavailable. (P. 484)
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Overheating
In the following situations, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The message “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and engine drive belt while the hybrid
system is running.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
476
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too
quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
5
When trouble arises
477
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever in “P”.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the hybrid system.
Turn off TRAC. ( P. 164)
Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and racing the hybrid system.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
478
Vehicle specification
6
6-1. Specifications ......................... 480
Maintenance data.................... 480
Fuel information......................... 489
Tire information.......................... 492
6-2. Customization........................ 500
Customizable features .......... 500
6-3. Initialization............................. 505
Items to initialize....................... 505
479
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
189.9 in. (4825 mm)
Overall width
71.6 in. (1820 mm)
Overall height *
56.1 in. (1425 mm)
Wheelbase
112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tread
Front
60.4 in. (1535 mm)
Rear
60.6 in. (1540 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*:Unladen vehicle
480
815 lb. (370 kg)
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the
engine compartment.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
Vehicle specifications
481
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Model
2GR-FSE
Type
6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70  3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)
Displacement
210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Premium unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal)
Electric motor (Traction motor)
Type
Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output
147 kW
Maximum torque
275 N•m (28.0 kgf•m, 202.8 ft•lbf)
Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
Type
Nickel-Metal hydride battery
Voltage
7.2 V/module
Capacity
6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity
40 modules
Overall voltage
288 V
482
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity 
(drain and refill)
with filter
without filter
6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity.
Recommended oil
viscosity
Outside temperature
*:5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.
Oil viscosity:
● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of
the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W
allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
483
Vehicle specifications
● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is as its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the
vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
6
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
Gasoline engine
Inverter
Coolant type
9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.1 lmp.qt.)
3.0 qt. (2.9 L, 2.5 lmp.qt.)
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
DENSO
NGK
Gap
FK20HBR11
ILFR6D11T
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
484
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at
68F (20C):
12.6  12.8V Fully charged
12.2  12.4V Half charged
11.8  12.0V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after
the hybrid system and all lights are
turned off.)
Charging rates
5A max.
Differential
Oil capacity
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)
Oil type and
viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85
6
Vehicle specifications
485
6-1. Specifications
Transmission
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
5.7 qt. (5.4 L, 4.8 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS
NOTICE
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Brakes
Pedal clearance *1
2.9 in. (74 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.08 in. (1.0  2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *2
5  7 clicks
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45
lbf) while the hybrid system is running.
2
* : Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 300 N (30.6 kgf,
67.4 lbf).
486
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Tire size
245/40R18 93Y, P245/40R18 93V, 
245/40ZR18, 155/70D17 110M (spare)
Driving under normal conditions
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160
Front and rear tire inflation 
km/h) (in countries where such speeds are perpressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation mitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
pressure)
front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the
maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated
on the tire sidewall.
Spare tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar,)
pressure)
Wheel size
18  8 J, 17  4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
Vehicle specifications
487
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Exterior
Interior
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
488
Bulb No.
W
Type
Headlights (low beam)
D4S
35
A
Headlights (high beam)
HB3
60
B
Front turn signal lights

21
C
Parking lights

5
D
Fog lights
HB4
51
E
Front side marker light
194
5
D
Rear turn signal lights

21
C
Back-up lights
921
16
D
Trunk light

5
F
Vanity lights

8
D
D4S high-intensity discharge bulbs
HB3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
HB4 halogen bulbs
Double end bulbs
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research
Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If premium gasoline is not available
If this premium fuel is not available, you may use unleaded gasoline with an Octane
Rating of 87 or so (Research Octane Number 91). 
The use of such gasoline may cause the engine to knock or drastically reduce output to protect itself while driving with a heavy load. To avoid this, refill the tank with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
6
Vehicle specifications
489
6-1. Specifications
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
490
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on gasoline quality
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohole
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
6
Vehicle specifications
491
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of tread wear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 494)
(P. 493)
(P. 375)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
492
(P. 497)
(P. 497)
6-1. Specifications
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 380)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
6
Vehicle specifications
493
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car, 
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
494
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
495
6
Vehicle specifications
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
6-1. Specifications
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
496
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
6
Vehicle specifications
497
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
498
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing it by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
6
Vehicle specifications
499
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Item
Smart access
system with
push-button
start 
(P. 14)
500
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart access system with
push-button start
ON
OFF
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
ON
OFF
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
ON
OFF
6-2. Customization
Item
Wireless
remote control 
(P. 23)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Wireless remote control
ON
OFF
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked 
in 2-steps
All doors
unlocked
in 1-step
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
30 seconds
60 seconds
Operation indicator
(Emergency flashers)
ON
OFF
Operation indicator
(Buzzer)
ON
OFF
Trunk unlocking function
ON
OFF
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold
Push twice
One short push
Panic function
ON
OFF
Buzzer sounds when
pushing
with any door
not closed.
ON
OFF
6
Vehicle specifications
Wireless
remote control 
(P. 23)
Function
501
6-2. Customization
Item
Default setting
Customized
setting
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked 
in 2-steps
All doors
unlocked
in 1-step
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
OFF
ON
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
OFF
ON
Shift the shift lever to “P”
unlocks all doors.
ON
OFF
Shift the shift lever to position other than “P” locks
all doors.
ON
OFF
Linked door lock operation
ON
OFF
Linked door key operation
Open and close
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
Function
Unlocking using a key
Door lock
(P. 26)
Power windows 
(P. 52)
502
Open only
Close only
OFF
6-2. Customization
Item
Moon roof
(P. 55)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Linked door lock operation
ON
OFF
Linked door key operation
Open and close
Close only
Linked operation of components when door key is
used
Slide only
Tilt only
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
OFF
Linked operation of components when wireless
remote control used
Slide only
Tilt only
Level 3
Levels 1 to 5
Light sensor sensitivity
Automatic
light control
system 
(P. 120)
Open only
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
Daytime running light
0 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
ON
OFF*
6
*: Vehicles sold outside Canada
Vehicle specifications
503
6-2. Customization
Item
Windshield
wipers and
washer 
(P. 124)
Illumination
(P. 307)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Switching operation when
the vehicle is stationary
ON
OFF
Drip prevention function
ON
OFF
Time elapsed before the
drip prevention function
operates
Variable
depending on
the vehicle
speed
3 seconds
Time elapsed before lights
turn off
15 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
ON
OFF
Operation after the
power switch turned
“OFF”
ON
OFF
Front/rear personal lights
turned on when a door is
opened
Corresponding
light only
All lights
OFF
Foot lights
ON
OFF
Shift lever light
ON
OFF
Outer foot light
ON
OFF
Time elapsed before the
Rear sunshade
reverse operation feature
(P. 329)
activates
504
7.5 seconds
0 seconds
0.7 seconds
0.9 seconds
1.2 seconds
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the 12 volt battery, the
hybrid system may not start. (P. 372) Also, the following items must be
initialized for normal system operation.
Item
When to initialize
Power window
Moon roof
Variable gear ratio
steering
Reference
P. 53
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse
Intuitive parking assist
P. 56
P. 151
P. 151
Engine oil maintenance
data
• After changing engine oil
P. 366
Tire pressure warning
system
• When rotating the tires on vehicles
differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling speed
or load weight, etc.
• When changing the tire size.
P. 377
6
Vehicle specifications
505
6-3. Initialization
506
For US owners
7
Reporting safety defects 
for U.S.A. owners.................. 508
507
Reporting safety defects for U.S.A. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25LEXUS).
■ If NHTSA receives similar complaints
It may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
■ To contact NHTSA
You may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-4249393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S.A. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
508
Index
Alphabetical index ............................ 510
What to do if... ..................................... 518
509
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C (Air conditioning system) ..........191
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........ 162
Active stabilizer suspension 
system...................................................... 162
Air conditioning system (A/C)
Air conditioning filter .........................391
Automatic air conditioning 
system..................................................... 191
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions............. 71
Airbag precautions for your 
child.......................................................... 75
Airbag warning light ..........................431
Curtain shield airbag 
precautions .......................................... 78
General airbag precautions ........... 75
Locations of airbags............................ 69
Modification and disposal of 
airbags.................................................... 79
Side airbag precautions .................... 75
Side and curtain shield airbags 
operating conditions ........................72
SRS airbags .............................................69
Alarm ............................................................64
Antenna ....................................................209
Armrest.....................................................328
Ashtrays..................................................... 321
Audio system
Antenna..................................................209
Cassette player..................................... 212
CD player/changer ...........................216
DVD information............................... 252
DVD player/changer...................... 232
DVD video/audio.............................235
MP3/WMA disc ............................... 224
Optimal use..........................................256
Radio........................................................203
510
Steering switches .............................. 260
Video CD ............................................. 248
Automatic headlight leveling 
system ......................................................122
Automatic light control system........ 120
AVS (Adaptive Variable 
Suspension System)............................ 161
B BA (Brake Assist)...................................162
Back-up lights
Wattage .................................................488
Battery
12 volt battery ........................................ 371
Checking................................................. 371
Hybrid battery (Traction battery) ....5
If the 12 volt battery is 
discharged .......................................... 471
Preparing and checking 
before winter...................................... 174
Bluetooth® .............................................. 266
Brake
Fluid.......................................................... 370
Parking brake........................................109
C Care
Exterior....................................................344
Interior..................................................... 346
Seat belts ................................................347
Cargo capacity........................................170
Cargo hooks .......................................... 332
CD player/changer............................. 232
Chains .........................................................176
Child-protectors.......................................27
Child restraint system (CRS)
Definition .................................................. 80
Installation ................................................ 83
Alphabetical index
Installing CRS with lower 
anchorages.......................................... 87
Installing CRS with seatbelts .......... 83
Installing CRS with top straps........88
Child safety
Airbag precautions ..............................75
Child restraint system ........................80
Child-protectors....................................27
How your child should wear 
the seatbelt........................................... 45
Installing child restraints.................... 83
Moon roof.................................................57
Power window lock switch ..............52
Power window precautions............ 54
Removed electronic key battery 
precautions ....................................... 394
Seat belt comfort guide......................43
Seat belt precautions...........................46
Seat heater precautions..... 324, 326
Trunk............................................................33
Cigarette lighter....................................322
Cleaning
Exterior ................................................... 344
Interior..................................................... 346
Seat belts ................................................347
Clock...........................................................319
Coin holder ..............................................314
Compass ................................................. 339
Condenser.............................................. 369
Console box.............................................312
Cooling system
Engine overheating.......................... 475
Cruise control
Cruise control........................................127
Dynamic radar cruise control.......130
Cup holders ............................................. 315
Curtain shield airbags............................69
Customizable features ...................... 500
D Daytime running light system .............121
Defogger
Rear window ......................................... 199
Side mirror.............................................. 199
Dimension............................................... 480
Dinghy towing.........................................180
Display
Energy flow................................................. 6
Multi-information display .................. 117
Touch screen ........................................ 182
Trip information .....................................118
Warning message.............................436
Do-it-yourself maintenance .............355
Door courtesy lights ........................... 308
Door pocket............................................. 316
Doors
Door lock..................................................26
Rear door child protector ................ 27
Driver's seat belt reminder light .....433
Driving
Correct posture..................................... 67
Procedures ..............................................94
DVD player/changer..........................232
E Electronic key
Replacing battery...............................393
When the electronic key battery 
is discharged.................................... 469
511
Alphabetical index
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on ..............430
If a warning message is 
displayed ............................................436
If the hybrid system will not 
start........................................................466
If the shift lever cannot be 
shifted from P................................... 467
If the 12 volt battery is 
discharged .........................................471
If you have a flat tire ............ 455, 456
If you lose your keys.........................468
If you think something is 
wrong....................................................427
If your vehicle becomes stuck.....478
If your vehicle needs to be 
towed ...................................................420
If your vehicle overheats................ 475
When the electronic key battery 
is discharged ....................................469
Energy monitor............................................ 6
Engine
Compartment .......................................361
Hood........................................................358
How to start the hybrid system ..... 101
If the hybrid system will not 
start........................................................466
Overheating......................................... 475
Power switch .......................................... 101
Engine compartment cover .............362
Engine coolant temperature 
gauge.........................................................110
Engine/inverter coolant
Capacity.................................................484
Checking ...............................................368
Preparing and checking 
before winter......................................174
512
Engine oil
Capacity ................................................ 483
Checking............................................... 363
Preparing and checking 
before winter...................................... 174
Engine oil maintenance data ........... 366
EPS (Electric Power Steering) .........162
Event data recorder ............................428
F
First-aid kit storage belt ..................... 332
Floor mats..................................................331
Fluid
Brake ....................................................... 370
Washer....................................................374
Fog lights
Switch........................................................ 123
Wattage .................................................488
Foot light ..................................................308
Front passenger's seat belt 
reminder light ..................................... 433
Front seats
Adjustment ...............................................34
Driving position memory ..................36
Front turn signal lights
Wattage .................................................488
Fuel
Capacity ................................................ 482
Fuel gauge................................................110
Gas station information .................520
Information ...........................................489
Refueling................................................... 58
Messages ..............................................450
Fuel filler door...........................................58
Fuses ..........................................................395
Alphabetical index
G Garage door opener.......................... 334
Gas station information..................... 520
Gauges........................................................ 110
Glove box .................................................312
H Hands-free system ...............................263
Head restraints..........................................39
Headlight aim ............................................411
Headlight cleaner ..................................126
Headlights
AFS (Adaptive Front lighting 
System) ...................................................121
Discharge headlights 
precautions .........................................418
Replacing light bulbs .........................413
Switch........................................................120
Wattage .................................................488
Heaters
Seat heaters.............................. 324, 326
Side mirror..............................................199
Hill-start assist control ......................... 162
Hood ......................................................... 358
Hooks
Cargo...................................................... 332
Shopping bag...................................... 332
Hybrid system ..................................................2
Emergency shut off system .................6
Energy monitor/consumption 
screen .........................................................6
High voltage components...................5
Power meter........................................... 110
Power switch .......................................... 101
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer 
system........................................................62
I
Illuminated entry system ....................307
I/M test......................................................354
Indicator lights...........................................114
Initialization
Items to initialize ................................505
Inside rear view mirror ..........................49
Instrument panel light control ............. 111
Interior lights
Interior lights........................................ 309
Wattage.................................................488
Intuitive parking assist.......................... 139
J
Jack
Positioning the jack.......................... 359
Replacing the wheel........................ 456
Jack handle..............................................456
K Keys
If you lose your keys........................ 468
Key number plate ...................................12
Keys ...............................................................12
Power switch...........................................101
Mechanical key........................................12
When the electronic key battery 
is discharged.................................... 469
Wireless remote control ................... 23
L
Light bulbs
Replacing ................................................ 413
Wattage.................................................488
Light sensitive optitron meter.............112
Lights
Fog light switch .....................................123
Headlights switch................................ 120
Interior lights list..................................307
Replacing light bulbs......................... 413
513
Alphabetical index
Turn signal lever..................................108
Vanity lights ........................................... 318
Wattage................................................. 488
P
Parking brake.......................................... 109
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 413
Switch........................................................120
Wattage .................................................488
PCS (Pre-Collision System)..............163
Personal lights........................................309
Power meter..............................................110
Power outlet ........................................... 323
Power windows........................................ 52
R
Radar cruise control............................. 130
Radiator....................................................369
Radio .............................................................. 203
RDS (Radio Date System) ................205
Rear sunshade ....................................... 329
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 413
Wattage .................................................488
Rear view monitor system ................. 158
Rear window defogger ........................199
Replacing
Electronic key battery..................... 393
Fuses........................................................ 395
Light bulbs .............................................. 413
Reporting safety defects for 
U.S.A. owners.....................................508
S
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ........................43
Automatic Locking Retractor 
(ALR).......................................................44
Child restraint system 
installation............................................. 83
Cleaning and maintaining 
the seat belts .....................................347
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance .........355
General maintenance .......................351
Maintenance data............................. 480
Maintenance requirements ..........349
Meter
Instrument panel light control .......... 111
Meters ........................................................ 110
Micro dust and pollen removal 
mode........................................................ 194
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror....................... 49
Side mirror heater...............................199
Side mirrors.............................................50
Vanity mirrors....................................... 318
Moon roof...................................................55
MP3 disc ...................................................... 224
Multi-information display........................117
O Odometer...................................................110
Oil
Engine oil ...............................................363
Opener
Fuel filler door.........................................58
Hood........................................................358
Trunk...........................................................30
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding .........................50
Driving position memory.................. 36
Outside temperature display...........320
Overhead console ................................ 313
Overheating, Engine............................. 475
514
Alphabetical index
Emergency Locking Retractor 
(ELR)........................................................44
How to wear your seat belt..............42
How your child should wear 
the seat belt.......................................... 45
Pre-collision seat belts........................44
Pregnant women, 
proper seat belt use..........................44
Reminder light..................................... 433
Seat belt extenders.............................. 45
Seat belt pretensioners.......................43
Seat heaters................................. 324, 326
Seat ventilators.......................................326
Seating capacity ..................................... 173
Seats
Child seats/child restraint 
system installation............................. 83
Cleaning ................................................ 346
Driving position memory ................. 36
Head restraint ........................................ 39
Properly sitting in the seat.................67
Seat adjustment......................................34
Seat adjustment precautions...........34
Seat heaters.............................. 324, 326
Ventilated seats.................................. 326
Service reminder indicators .............. 115
Shift lever
If the shift lever cannot be 
shifted from P................................... 467
Transmission..........................................104
Shift lock system ....................................467
Shopping bag hooks........................... 332
Side airbags................................................69
Side marker lights
Switch........................................................120
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding .........................50
Driving position memory..................36
Smart access system with 
push-button start
Antenna location.....................................16
Entry function............................................14
Starting the hybrid system................101
Spare tire
Inflation pressure................................487
Spare tire................................................457
Spark plug................................................484
Specifications ........................................ 480
Speedometer ............................................110
Steering wheel
Adjustment...............................................48
Audio switches................................... 260
Driving position memory..................36
Storage compartment ......................... 314
Storage feature.........................................311
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck.....478
Sun visors ...................................................317
Switch
Fog light switch .....................................123
Light switches ....................................... 120
Mode select switch............................105
Power door lock switch .................... 26
Power switch...........................................101
Power window switch ........................52
Window lock switch............................52
Wipers and washer switch .............124
T
Tail lights
Switch........................................................ 120
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...........................................................64
515
Alphabetical index
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer 
system..................................................... 62
Theft prevention labels ..........................66
Tire inflation pressure .........................487
Tire information
Glossary................................................. 497
Size ...........................................................494
Tire identification number .............493
Uniform tire quality grading.........495
Tires
Chains .......................................................176
Checking ...............................................375
Compact spare tire .......................... 457
If you have a flat tire............. 455, 456
Inflation pressure................................487
Information............................................ 492
Pressure warning system ..............375
Replacing...............................................456
Rotating tires ........................................375
Size ...........................................................487
Snow tires................................................ 177
Tools...........................................................456
Total load capacity ................................ 173
Touch screen........................................... 182
Towing
Dinghy towing......................................180
Emergency towing .............................421
Trailer towing.........................................179
TRAC (Traction control).................... 162
Transmission
If the shift lever cannot be 
shifted from P................................... 467
Mode select switch............................ 105
S mode..................................................... 106
Transmission ......................................... 104
Trip meter .................................................... 111
516
Trunk
Opener ..................................................... 30
Trunk light .................................................32
Wattage .................................................488
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 413
Switch........................................................108
Wattage .................................................488
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights............................................318
Wattage .................................................488
Vanity mirrors .............................................318
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics 
Integrated Management) ................163
Vehicle identification number.......... 481
Vehicle load limits ..................................173
Ventilators............................................... 326
VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio 
Steering) .................................................162
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ......162
W Warning buzzers
Brake system....................................... 430
Downshifting..........................................106
Open door ...........................................432
Seat belt reminder ............................ 433
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ....432
Brake system....................................... 430
Charging system................................. 431
ECB/VSC (Electronically 
Controlled Brake System/
Vehicle Stability Control)...........432
Alphabetical index
Electric power steering 
warning light..................................... 432
Low fuel level....................................... 432
Malfunction indicator lamp ............431
Master warning light........................ 433
Open door ........................................... 432
Pre-collision system......................... 432
Seat belt reminder light .................. 433
SRS airbags............................................431
Tire pressure warning light........... 433
Warning messages
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...442
Brake Assist (BA) ..............................442
Dynamic radar 
cruise control ...................................440
Engine oil level.................................... 445
Engine oil maintenance.................. 445
Engine oil pressure............................437
Headlight...............................................438
Hill-start assist control......................442
Hood ....................................................... 443
Hybrid system..........................437, 447
Intuitive parking 
assist .............................. 439, 446, 451
Moon roof............................................. 444
Open door ........................................... 443
Parking brake...................................... 444
Pre-Collision System ..........439, 446
Refueling ................................................450
Rear lights system .............................438
Smart access system with 
push-button start............................ 452
Steering lock............................439, 454
Tire pressure warning 
system......................................438, 446
TRAC (Traction control 
system).................................................442
Trunk ........................................................444
VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio 
Steering) .............................................442
VSC/ECB (Vehicle Stability 
Control/Electronically Controlled 
Brake system) ..................................442
Washer fluid .........................................444
Washer
Checking ...............................................374
Preparing and checking 
before winter ......................................174
Switch.........................................................124
Washing and waxing...........................344
Weight
Cargo capacity.................................... 170
Load limits ...............................................173
Weight....................................................480
Wheels ..................................................... 389
Window glasses ......................................52
Window lock switch ...............................52
Windows
Power windows.....................................52
Rear window defogger.................... 199
Washer .....................................................124
Windshield wipers
Position......................................................176
Windshield wipers ..............................124
Winter driving tips..................................174
Wireless remote control
Locking/Unlocking ............................. 23
Replacing the battery.......................393
WMA disc ............................................... 224
517
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 455/
If you have a flat tire
456
The hybrid system does not start
Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system
P. 466 If the hybrid system will not start
P. 471 If the 12 volt battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be 
moved out
P. 467
P. 62
If the shift lever cannot be shifted 
from “P”
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 475 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming 
from under the hood
518
The key is lost
P. 468 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 471
If the 12 volt battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 26
Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 64
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 478 If the vehicle becomes stuck
What to do if...
The warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 430 If the warning light turns on
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
or
Malfunction indicator lamp
v
P. 430
or
P. 431
Driver’s seat belt reminder 
light
P. 433
ABS warning light
or
P. 432
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 433
ECB*/VSC warning light
Tire pressure warning light
P. 432
P. 433
Low fuel level warning light
P. 432
Electric power steering warning
light
P. 432
P. 431
Pre-collision system warning light
P. 432
SRS warning light
Open door warning light
P. 432
Charging system warning
light
P. 431
The warning message is displayed
Master warning light
P. 433
*: Electronically Controlled Brake 
System
P. 436 If the warning message is displayed
519
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 358
Trunk opener
P. 30
Hood lock release lever
P. 358
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation 
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill)
Engine oil type
520
Fuel filler door opener
P. 58
Fuel filler door
P. 58
Tire inflation pressure
P. 487
17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.)
Premium unleaded gasoline only
P. 59, 482
P. 487
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
With filler
6.6 (6.3, 5.5)
Without filler
6.2 (5.9, 5.2)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
P. 483
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement